User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Introduction
Thank you for choosing this machine.
This manual contains details on the operation of the various functions of the
machine, precautions on its use, and basic troubleshooting procedures. In
order to ensure that this machine is used correctly and efficiently, carefully
read this manual before using the machine. After reading the manual, store
it in the designated holder so that it can easily be referred to when questions
or problems arise during operation.
The illustrations used in this manual may appear slightly different from views
of the actual equipment.
®
Energy Star
®
As an Energy Star Partner, we have determined that this machine meets the
®
Energy Star Guidelines for energy efficiency.
®
What is an Energy Star product?
®
An Energy Star product has a special feature that allows it to automatically
®
switch to a “low-power mode” after a period of inactivity. An Energy Star
product uses energy more efficiently, saves you money on utility bills and
helps protect the environment.
C250P
x-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Trademarks and registered trademarks
KONICA MINOLTA, KONICA MINOLTA Logo, and The essentials of imaging
are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS,
INC.
PageScope and bizhub are registered trademarks or trademarks of KONICA
MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Netscape Communications, the Netscape Communications logo, Netscape
Navigator, Netscape Communicator, and Netscape are trademarks of Net-
scape Communications Corporation.
This machine is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
Compact-VJE
Copyright 1986-2003 VACS Corp.
®
RC4 is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the Unit-
ed States and/or other countries.
®
RSA is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. RSA
®
BSAFE is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc. in the
United States and/or other countries.
License information
This product includes RSA BSAFE Cryptographic software
from RSA Security Inc.
OpenSSL Statement
OpenSSL License
Copyright © 1998-2000 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright no-
tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documen-
tation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
C250P
x-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used
to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor
may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission
of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following ac-
knowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for
use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND
ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIM-
ITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CON-
SEQENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCURE-
MENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hud-
son ([email protected]).
Original SSLeay License
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@crypt-
soft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the fol-
lowing conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code
found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, Ihash, DES, etc., code; not just
the SSL code.
The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@crypt-
soft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the
code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This
can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documen-
tation (online or textual) provided with the package.
C250P
x-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modifica-
tion, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright no-
tice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documen-
tation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must
display the following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library be-
ing used are not cryptographic related.
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledge-
ment:
“This product includes software written by Tin Hudson (tjh@crypt-
soft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EX-
PRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AU-
THOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI-
DENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILI-
TY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or de-
rivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be cop-
ied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public
Licence.]
All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective companies
C250P
x-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
This package contains the following materials provided by Konica Minolta
Business Technologies, Inc. (KMBT): software included as part of the printing
system, the digitally-encoded machine-readable outline data encoded in the
special format and in the encrypted form (“Font Programs”), other software
which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing
Software (“Host Software”), and related explanatory written materials (“Doc-
umentation”). The term “Software” shall be used to describe Printing Soft-
ware, Font Programs and/or Host Software and also include any upgrades,
modified versions, additions, and copies of the Software.
The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement.
KMBT grants to you a non-exclusive sublicense to use the Software and
Documentation, provided that you agree to the following:
1. You may use the Printing Software and accompanying Font Programs for
imaging to the licensed output de-vice(s), solely for your own internal
business purposes.
2. In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 (“Print-
ing Software”) above, you may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce
weights, styles, and versions of letters, numerals, characters and sym-
bols (“Typefaces”) on the display or monitor for your own internal busi-
ness purposes.
3. You may make one backup copy of the Host Software, provided your
backup copy is not installed or used on any computer. Notwithstanding
the above restrictions, you may install the on any number of computers
solely for use with one or more printing systems running the Printing Soft-
ware.
4. You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of
Licensee’s right and interest to such Software and Documentation (“As-
signee”) provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software
and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
5. You agree not to modify, adapt or translate the Software and Documen-
tation.
6. You agree that you will not attempt to alter, disassemble, decrypt, re-
verse engineer or decompile the Software.
7. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any re-
productions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor.
8. Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark prac-
tice, including identification of the trademark owner’s name. Trademarks
can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software.
Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in
that trademark.
C250P
x-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
9. You may not rent, lease, sublicense, lend or transfer versions or copies
of the Software Licensee does not use, or Software contained on any un-
used media, except as part of the permanent transfer of all Software and
Documentation as described above.
10. IN NO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL INDIRECT, PUNITIVE OR SPE-
CIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING,
EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY. KMBT OR ITS
LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE
SOFTWARE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITA-
TION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. SOME STATES OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR SPECIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT AP-
PLY TO YOU.
11. Notice to Government End Users: The Software is a “commercial item,”
as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R.2.101, consisting of “commercial com-
puter software” and “commercial computer software documentation,” as
such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent with 48 C.F.R.
12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, all U.S. Govern-
ment End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth
herein.
12. You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of
any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any
countries.
C250P
x-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Contents
Introduction
®
Energy Star ......................................................................................x-1
®
Contents .............................................................................................x-7
1
1.1
1.2
CDRH regulations .........................................................................1-11
Ozone release ...............................................................................1-14
Acoustic noise (for European users only) .....................................1-15
For EU member states only ..........................................................1-15
For EU member states only ..........................................................1-15
1.3
1.4
1.5
Caution notations and labels .........................................................1-16
Space requirements ........................................................................1-17
Operation precautions ....................................................................1-18
Power source ................................................................................1-18
Operating environment .................................................................1-18
Storage of printed pages ..............................................................1-18
C250P
x-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
1.6
Options .........................................................................................1-19
Finisher FS-501/Job separator JS-601 ........................................1-32
Control panel ................................................................................1-38
1.7
1.8
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode) ...........................1-42
2
2.1
2.2
For Windows Me/2000 .................................................................2-17
For Windows XP/Server 2003 ......................................................2-18
Uninstalling the printer driver .......................................................2-20
When used with Macintosh ..........................................................2-21
Installing the printer driver ............................................................2-22
For Mac OS X ...............................................................................2-22
Selecting a printer ........................................................................2-24
For Mac OS X ...............................................................................2-24
For Mac OS 9.2 ............................................................................2-27
Uninstalling the printer driver .......................................................2-29
For Mac OS X ...............................................................................2-29
C250P
x-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
2.3
Test printing ..................................................................................2-31
2.4
Operations on this machine ..........................................................2-41
Printer driver settings (For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) ........2-43
installed to connect using Port 9100 (Windows 98SE/Me) ..........2-49
For remote printer mode with NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation ....2-53
For print server mode with NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation ........2-55
For NetWare 4.x remote printer mode (NDS) ...............................2-57
For NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS) ..........................2-59
For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS) .......2-61
Specifying client (Windows) settings when using the NetWare
server ............................................................................................2-62
Printing with Macintosh ................................................................2-64
Operations on this machine ..........................................................2-64
Specifying the AppleTalk settings ................................................2-64
Specifying the Bonjour settings ....................................................2-66
C250P
x-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
3
3.1
3.2
Settings ...........................................................................................3-6
Stapling .........................................................................................3-17
Chapter .........................................................................................3-23
Specifying the Watermark tab settings ........................................3-29
Printing a watermark ....................................................................3-29
Editing a watermark ......................................................................3-30
Printing the document number .....................................................3-31
Copy protect .................................................................................3-32
Specifying the Quality tab settings ...............................................3-34
Specifying settings .......................................................................3-35
Specifying the Font tab settings ...................................................3-36
Replacing fonts .............................................................................3-36
Specifying the Option tab settings ...............................................3-37
Selecting options ..........................................................................3-37
C250P
x-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
3.3
Settings .........................................................................................3-42
Stapling .........................................................................................3-55
To save the driver settings ...........................................................3-65
3.4
Setting up the PPD driver (Windows) ............................................3-68
Settings .........................................................................................3-68
Specifying the Paper tab settings ................................................3-71
Specifying settings .......................................................................3-71
Specifying the Device Options tab settings .................................3-72
Specifying settings .......................................................................3-72
Specifying the options ..................................................................3-74
To select an option .......................................................................3-74
3.5
Setting up the PPD driver (Mac OS 9.2) ........................................3-76
Settings .........................................................................................3-76
Page Setup dialog box .................................................................3-76
C250P
x-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Printing .........................................................................................3-84
3.6
Settings .........................................................................................3-90
Printing .........................................................................................3-98
Paper Feed .................................................................................3-100
Security .......................................................................................3-100
Finishing .....................................................................................3-103
Quality .........................................................................................3-104
Setup ..........................................................................................3-106
4
Control panel settings
4.1
Control panel .....................................................................................4-2
Available keys .................................................................................4-2
Basic operations .............................................................................4-3
Basic menu operations ...................................................................4-3
Sleep mode ....................................................................................4-5
Administrator password .................................................................4-8
4.2
4.3
Overview of utility mode parameters ............................................4-10
Settings menu list .........................................................................4-10
Parameters ......................................................................................4-31
Job Operation ...............................................................................4-31
C250P
x-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Admin. Setting ..............................................................................4-38
Password Rules ............................................................................4-47
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
Paper ..................................................................................................5-2
Print area ........................................................................................5-8
Auto tray switch feature ..................................................................5-8
To load paper (Tray 1) ..................................................................5-10
Loading paper into Tray 2, 3, or 4 ................................................5-15
Loading paper into the bypass tray ..............................................5-21
Specifying finishing settings ..........................................................5-27
Stapling prints (Staple settings) ....................................................5-27
Punching holes in prints (Punch settings) ....................................5-29
Specifying center binding .............................................................5-30
6
Replacing consumables
6.1
Replacing the toner cartridge ..........................................................6-2
To replace the toner cartridge ........................................................6-5
6.2
Replacing the staples .......................................................................6-9
To replace the staple cartridge for Finisher FS-501 .....................6-10
C250P
x-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
6.3
7
7.1
Cleaning .............................................................................................7-2
Housing ..........................................................................................7-2
Paper take-up roller ........................................................................7-3
Print head .......................................................................................7-5
Emptying the waste containers ......................................................7-6
7.2
8
Troubleshooting
8.1
8.2
To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT ............................................8-12
To clear a banner paper misfeed ..................................................8-21
To clear a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-501 ................................8-26
To clear a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-603 ................................8-31
To clear a paper misfeed in the Finisher FS-514 ..........................8-35
To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin .......................................8-39
To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher ...........................8-41
8.3
8.4
When the message “Replenish paper” appears ..........................8-43
To replenish paper ........................................................................8-43
Clearing a staple jam ......................................................................8-44
To clear jammed staples in Finisher FS-501 ................................8-44
C250P
x-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
To clear jammed staples in the Finisher FS-514 ..........................8-52
8.5
8.6
Main unit .......................................................................................8-62
Finisher .........................................................................................8-63
Printer driver .................................................................................8-64
8.7
9
Additional settings
9.1
Job tab ...........................................................................................9-9
Box tab .........................................................................................9-10
Print tab ........................................................................................9-10
Job tab .........................................................................................9-13
Box tab .........................................................................................9-13
Print tab ........................................................................................9-14
9.2
9.3
Available parameters ....................................................................9-16
Opening Boxes .............................................................................9-16
To open a box ..............................................................................9-18
Checking Box Information ............................................................9-19
Changing the Box Settings ...........................................................9-20
Deleting a Box ..............................................................................9-22
Creating Boxes .............................................................................9-23
Managing print jobs ........................................................................9-25
Specifying job operations .............................................................9-25
Storing jobs ..................................................................................9-28
Recalling a job ..............................................................................9-28
C250P
x-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Setting procedure (for Windows) ..................................................9-32
Setting procedure (for Mac OS X) ................................................9-34
9.4
Paper ............................................................................................9-35
Printing .........................................................................................9-36
To print .........................................................................................9-36
10 Appendix
10.1 Specifications ..................................................................................10-2
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403 ........................................................10-6
Finisher FS-514 ............................................................................10-9
Mailbin kit MT-501 ......................................................................10-10
10.2 Configuration page .......................................................................10-11
10.3 Font list ..........................................................................................10-12
PCL font list ................................................................................10-12
PS font list ..................................................................................10-13
10.4 Test page .......................................................................................10-14
10.5 Glossary .........................................................................................10-15
Glossary ......................................................................................10-15
10.6 Index ...............................................................................................10-20
C250P
x-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Explanation of manual conventions
Note
Titles indicate the contents of the section.
Text highlighted in this manner
contains references and supplemental
information concerning operating
procedures and other descriptions.
We recommend that this information
be read carefully.
Replacing Toner Cartridges and Staples and Emptying Waste Containers
9
9.1
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When the toner is about to run out, the advanced warning message shown
below appears.
Example: Message when the yellow toner is about to run out
[
]
Note
Names highlighted as shown above
indicate keys on the control panel
and buttons in application windows
and dialog boxes.
When the message appears, replace the toner cartridge according to
your maintenance agreement.
1
2
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The settings menu ap-
pears.
Press the [ ↑ ] and [ ↓ ] keys until User Setting appears.
Screens are shown so that the
actual display can be checked.
Reminder
Do not replace the toner cartridge until the message Replace the Toner
Cartridge. appears. In addition, do not replace the toner cartridge of any
color other than the one indicated in the message on the control panel.
Reminder
Text highlighted in this manner
indicates operation precautions.
Carefully read and observe this
type of information.
Detail
About 1000 (A4) pages can be printed after the message Toner Car-
tridge (X) needs to be replaced soon. appears.
CAUTION
Metallic parts on the inside of the upper cover are very hot.
Touching any part other than the paper may result in
burns.
Detail
C250P
9-2
Text highlighted in this manner
provides more detailed information
concerning operating procedures or
references to sections containing
additional information. If necessary,
refer to the indicated sections.
WARNING , CAUTION
Text highlighted in this manner indicates precautions to ensure safe use of this machine.
"Warning" indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in fatal or critical injuries.
"Caution" indicates instructions that, when not observed, may result in serious injuries or
property damage.
(The page shown above is an example only.)
C250P
x-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
C250P
x-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Installation and operation
precautions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1
Installation and operation precautions
1.1
Safety information
This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance
of this machine. To achieve optimum utility of this device, all operators
should carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual.
Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the sup-
ply. It contains important information related to user safety and preventing
equipment problems.
Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine.
Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this
manual.
KM_Ver.01E_C
Note
Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the
purchased product.
Warning and precaution symbols
The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to
categorize the level of safety warnings.
Ignoring this warning could cause serious injury
or even death.
WARNING
Ignoring this caution could cause injury or dam-
age to property.
CAUTION
Meaning of symbols
A triangle indicates a danger against which you should take pre-
caution.
This symbol warns against cause burns.
A diagonal line indicates a prohibited course of action.
This symbol warns against dismantling the device.
A solid circle indicates an imperative course of action.
This symbol indicates you must unplug the device.
C250P
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Disassemble and modification
WARNING
• Do not attempt to remove the covers and pan-
els which have been fixed to the product. Some
products have a high-voltage part or a laser
beam source inside that could cause an electri-
cal shock or blindness.
• Do not modify this product, as a fire, electrical
shock, or breakdown could result. If the prod-
uct employs a laser, the laser beam source
could cause blindness.
Power cord
WARNING
• Use only the power cord supplied in the pack-
age. If a power cord is not supplied, only use
the power cord and plug that is specified in
POWER CORD INSTRUCTION. Failure to use
this cord could result in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Use the power cord supplied in the package
only for this machine and NEVER use it for any
other product. Failure to observe this precau-
tion could result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not scratch, abrade, place a heavy object
on, heat, twist, bend, pull on, or damage the
power cord. Use of a damaged power cord (ex-
posed core wire, broken wire, etc.) could result
in a fire or breakdown.
Should any of these conditions be found, im-
mediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then
call your authorized service representative.
C250P
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Power source
WARNING
• Use only the specified power source voltage.
Failure to do that could result in a fire or electri-
cal shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet
having the same configuration as the plug. Use
of an adapter leads to the product connecting
to inadequate power supply (voltage, current
capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or
shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, the
customer shall ask qualified electrician for the
installation.
• Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an ex-
tension cord in principle. Use of an adapter or
an extension cord could cause a fire or electri-
cal shock.
Contact your authorized service representative
if an extension cord is required.
• Consult your authorized service representative
before connecting other equipment on the
same wall outlet. Overload could result in a fire.
CAUTION
• The outlet must be near the equipment and
easily accessible. Otherwise you can not pull
out the power plug when an emergency occurs.
C250P
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Power plug
WARNING
• Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with
a wet hand, as an electrical shock could result.
• Plug the power cord all the way into the power
outlet. Failure to do this could result in a fire or
electrical shock.
CAUTION
• Do not tug the power cord when unplugging.
Pulling on the power cord could damage the
cord, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
• Remove the power plug from the outlet more
than one time a year and clean the area be-
tween the plug terminals. Dust that accumu-
lates between the plug terminals may cause a
fire.
Grounding
WARNING
• Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet
that is equipped with a grounding terminal.
C250P
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Installation
WARNING
• Do not place a flower vase or other container
that contains water, or metal clips or other
small metallic objects on this product. Spilled
water or metallic objects dropped inside the
product could result in a fire, electrical shock,
or breakdown.
Should a piece of metal, water, or any other
similar foreign matter get inside the product,
immediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then
call your authorized service representative.
CAUTION
• After installing this product, mount it on a se-
cure base. If the unit moves or falls, it may
cause personal injury.
• Do not place the product in a dusty place, or a
site exposed to soot or steam, near a kitchen
table, bath, or a humidifier. A fire, electrical
shock, or breakdown could result.
• Do not place this product on an unstable or tilt-
ed bench, or in a location subject to a lot of vi-
bration and shock. It could drop or fall, causing
personal injury or mechanical breakdown.
• Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes
of this product. Heat could accumulate inside
the product, resulting in a fire or malfunction.
• Do not use flammable sprays, liquids, or gases
near this product, as a fire could result.
C250P
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Ventilation
CAUTION
• Always use this product in a well ventilated lo-
cation. Operating the product in a poorly venti-
lated room for an extended period of time could
injure your health. Ventilate the room at regular
intervals.
Actions in response to troubles
WARNING
• Do not keep using this product, if this product
becomes inordinately hot or emits smoke, or
unusual odor or noise. Immediately turn OFF
the power switch, unplug the power cord from
the power outlet, and then call your authorized
service representative. If you keep on using it
as is, a fire or electrical shock could result.
• Do not keep using this product, if this product
has been dropped or its cover damaged. Im-
mediately turn OFF the power switch, unplug
the power cord from the power outlet, and then
call your authorized service representative. If
you keep on using it as is, a fire or electrical
shock could result.
CAUTION
• The inside of this product has areas subject to
high temperature, which may cause burns.
When checking the inside of the unit for mal-
functions such as a paper misfeed, do not
touch the locations (around the fusing unit, etc.)
which are indicated by a “Caution HOT” cau-
tion label.
C250P
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not throw the toner cartridge or toner into an
open flame. The hot toner may scatter and
cause burns or other damage.
CAUTION
• Do not leave a toner unit or drum unit in a place
within easy reach of children. Licking or ingest-
ing any of these things could injure your health.
• Do not store toner units and PC drum units near
a floppy disk or watch that are susceptible to
magnetism. They could cause these products
to malfunction.
When moving the machine
CAUTION
• Whenever moving this product, be sure to dis-
connect the power cord and other cables. Fail-
ure to do this could damage the cord or cable,
resulting in a fire, electrical shock, or break-
down.
• When moving this product, always hold it by
the locations specified in the User’s Guide or
other documents. If the unit falls it may cause
severe personal injury. The product may also
be damaged or malfunction.
Before successive holidays
CAUTION
• Unplug the product when you will not use the
product for long periods of time.
C250P
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.2
Regulation notices
CE Marking (Declaration of conformity) for users of the European Union
(EU)
This product complies with the following EU directives:
89/336/EEC, 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC directives.
This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union.
This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under
CISPR rules and local rules.
USER INSTRUCTIONS FCC PART 15 - RADIO FREQUENCY DEVICES
(for U.S.A. users)
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
WARNING: The design and production of this unit conform to FCC regula-
tions, and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and
are subject to FCC control. Any changes made by the purchaser or user
without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under
FCC regulations.
This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under
FCC rules.
INTERFERENCE-CAUSING EQUIPMENT STANDARD (ICES-003
ISSUE 4) (for Canada users)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
C250P
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
For users in countries not subject to class B regulations
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
This device must be used with a shielded network (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
cable and a shielded parallel cable. The use of non-shielded cables is likely
to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under
CISPR rules and local rules.
Laser safety
This is a digital machine which operates using a laser. There is no possibility
of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the
instructions in this manual.
Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective
housing, the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase
of user operation.
This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product: This means the machine
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
Internal laser radiation
Maximum Average Radiation Power: 8.0 μW at the laser aperture of the print
head unit.
Wavelength: 775-800 nm
This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser
beam.
The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print
head unit.
The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM:
Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstanc-
es.
C250P
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Laser aperture
of the print head
unit
Print head
CDRH regulations
This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Per-
formance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990.
Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States
and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of
the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce haz-
ardous laser radiation.
The label shown on page 1-14 indicates compliance with the CDRH regula-
tions and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10
mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
C250P
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
For European users
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This is a semiconductor laser. The maximum power of the laser diode is 10
mW and the wavelength is 775-800 nm.
For Denmark users
ADVARSEL
Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funk-
tion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder
IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene.
Dansk: Dette er en halvlederlaser. Laserdiodens højeste styrke er 10 mW og
bølgelængden er 775-800 nm.
For Finland, Sweden users
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle la-
sersäteilylle.
Tämä on puolijohdelaser. Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 10 mW ja aallonpituus
on 775-800 nm.
VARNING!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificer-
ats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider
gränsen för laserklass 1.
Det här är en halvledarlaser. Den maximala effekten för laserdioden är 10 mW
och våglängden är 775-800 nm.
VARO!
Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle la-
sersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
C250P
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
VARNING!
Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej strålen.
For Norway users
ADVERSEL
Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksan-
visning, kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider
grensen for laser klass 1.
Dette en halvleder laser. Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 10 mW og bølge-
lengde er 775-800 nm.
C250P
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Laser safety label
A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine, as shown be-
low.
* Only for the U.S.A.
Ozone release
Locate the Machine in a Well-Ventilated Room
A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of this
machine. An unpleasant odor may, however, be created in poorly ventilated
rooms during extensive machine operations. For a comfortable, healthy and
safe operating environment, it is recommended that the room be well venti-
lated.
Placer l’appareil dans une pièce largement ventilée
Une quantité d’ozone négligable est dégagée pendant le fonctionnement de
l’appareil quand celui-ci est utilisé normalement. Cependant, une odeur
désagréable peut être ressentie dans les pièces dont l’aération est insuff-
isante et lorsque une utilisation prolongée de l’appareil est effectuée. Pour
avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnment réunissant des condi-
tions de confort, santé et de sécurité, il est préférable de bien aérer la pièce
ou se trouve l’appareil.
C250P
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Acoustic noise (for European users only)
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV: Der höchste
Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäss EN ISO 7779.
For EU member states only
EN This symbol means: Do not dispose of this
product together with your household waste!
Please refer to the information of your local com-
munity or contact our dealers regrading the prop-
er handling of end-of-life electric and electronic
equipments. Recycling of this product will help to
conserve natural resources and prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment and
human health caused by inappropriate waste
handling.
For EU member states only
This product complies with RoHS (2002/95/EC) Directive.
C250P
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.3
Caution notations and labels
Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the follow-
ing positions.
Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as re-
moving paper misfeeds are performed.
WARNING
Do not burn used
toner cartridges.
Toner expelled from
the fire is dangerous.
CAUTION
Do not alter or remove
any covers or panels
attached to this
machine, otherwise
you may be exposed
to laser radiation.
WARNING
CAUTION
Do not position the used
waste-toner box so that
it is standing on end or
tilted, otherwise toner
may spill.
The area around the
fusing unit is extremely
hot. Touching any part
other than those
indicated may result in
burns.
CAUTION
Do not burn the used
waste-toner box.
Toner expelled from
the fire is dangerous.
WARNING
Do not burn used
imaging units. Toner
expelled from the fire
is dangerous.
C250P
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.4
Space requirements
To ensure that machine operation, consumables replenishing, part replace-
ment, and regular maintenance can easily be performed, adhere to the rec-
ommended space requirements detailed below.
285
(11-1/4)
1251
(49-1/4)
313
(12-1/4)
437
(17-1/4)
712
(28)
100
(4)
Unit: mm (inch)
C250P+FS-603+PC-403
Reminder
Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm (4 inch) or more at the back of
this machine for the ventilation duct.
C250P
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.5
Operation precautions
To ensure the optimum performance of this machine, observe the precau-
tions described below.
Power source
The power source requirements are as follows.
-
Voltage fluctuation: Maximum ± 10% (at 110 V/120 to 127 V/220 to 240
V AC)
-
–
Frequency fluctuation: Maximum ± 3 Hz (at 50 Hz/60 Hz)
Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as
possible.
Operating environment
The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as
follows.
-
Temperature: 10°C (50°F) to 30°C (86°F) with fluctuations of no more than
10°C (18°F) within an hour
-
Humidity: 15% to 85% with fluctuations of no more than 20% within an
hour
Storage of printed pages
To store printed pages, follow the recommendation listed below.
-
-
-
Printed pages that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where
they are not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading.
Adhesive that contains solvent (e.g., spray glue) may dissolve the toner
on printed pages.
Color printed pages have a thicker layer of toner than normal black-and-
white printed pages. Therefore, when a color printed page is folded, the
toner at the fold may peel off.
C250P
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
Part Name
Description
1
Main unit
The data sent from the computer is printed.
Referred to as the “machine”, the “main unit”, or
the “C250P” throughout the manual.
2
Automatic Duplex Unit AD-503
Turns over printed pages, allowing double-sided
pages to be printed automatically.
Required to print on letterhead paper.
Referred to as the “automatic duplex unit” through-
out the manual.
3
4
Desk DK-502
Allows this machine to be set up on the floor.
Referred to as the “desk” throughout the manual.
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103
The top tray can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of
paper, and the bottom tray can be used as storage.
Referred to as the “single paper feed cabinet”
throughout the manual.
5
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203
Both the top and bottom trays can each be loaded
with up to 500 sheets of paper.
Referred to as the “double paper feed cabinet”
throughout the manual.
6
7
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403
Finisher FS-603
Can be loaded with up to 2,500 sheets of paper
Referred to as the “LCT” throughout the manual.
Feeds out printed pages. The “Offset” setting (sep-
arating), Staple settings (stapling), and “Fold & Sta-
ple” function (binding) are available.
•
In order to install the finisher, the main unit must
be installed on the desk, on the LCT, on the sin-
gle paper feed cabinet, or on the double paper
feed cabinet.
8
9
Punch Kit PK-501
Finisher FS-501
Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto
Finisher FS-603.
Finishes printed pages according to the selected
Output setting (sorting or stapling), then feeds out
the pages.
•
In order to install the finisher, the main unit must
be installed on the desk, on the LCT, or on the
single paper feed cabinet or the double paper
feed cabinet.
10
11
Job Separator JS-601
Finisher FS-514
Print exit tray installed on Finisher FS-501
Referred to as the “job separator” throughout the
manual.
Feeds out finished printed pages. The “Sort” set-
ting (separating by copy set), “Group” setting (sep-
arating by page), and Staple settings (corner
stapling and two-point stapling) are available.
12
13
Output Tray OT-601
Punch Kit PK-510
Print output tray installed onto the finisher FS-514
and used for separating printed pages
Referred to as the “optional finishing tray”
throughout the manual.
Allows hole punching to be used if installed onto
finisher FS-514
C250P
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
Part Name
Description
14
Mailbin Kit MT-501
Installed onto the finisher FS-514 to divide printed
pages and feed them into the appropriate tray
assigned to a specific individual or group
Referred to as the “mailbin” throughout the manual.
15
Saddle Stitcher SD-503
Installed onto the finisher FS-514 so that prints can
be bound or folded at the center
Referred to as the “saddle stitcher” throughout the
manual.
16
17
18
Local Interface Kit EK-702*
Dehumidifer Heater 1C*
Hard Disk Drive HD-501*
Used for making a local connection between this
machine and the computer.
Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to
prevent humidity from collecting in the paper.
Operations using the “Secured Print” and “Save in
User Box” settings can be used if the hard disk
drive is installed.
Referred to as the “HDD” throughout the manual.
19
Security Kit SC-503*
Installed to encode the data saved on the HDD so
that the HDD can be used more safely.
*
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are internal options and therefore are not shown in the illustra-
tion.
Reminder
In order to maintain the functionality and quality of the machine, be sure
to use the desk or paper feed cabinet when installing the machine on the
floor.
C250P
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
1
Part Name
Description
Automatic duplex unit
Multiple bypass tray
Turns over the paper for double-sided printing
2
Used when printing onto paper with a size not
overhead projector transparencies, postcards,
envelopes or label sheets
Holds up to 100 sheets of plain paper, 10 overhead
projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets,
sheets of thick paper, or envelopes
Referred to as the “bypass tray” throughout the
manual. (See p. 5-21.)
3
4
5
6
LCT
per
Tray release button
Tray 2
LCT
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
(See p. 5-15.)
Tray 1
Can be loaded with up to 250 sheets of plain paper,
can be set to different paper sizes, and can be load-
ed with up to 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead
projector transparencies, postcards, label sheets,
or envelopes (See p. 5-10.)
7
8
9
Front door
Opened when replacing a toner cartridge (See
p. 6-5.)
Power switch
Print exit tray
Used to turn the machine on and off (See
page 1-39)
Collects printed pages
C250P
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
17
* The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional automatic du-
plex unit, and double paper feed cabinet installed.
C250P
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
Part Name
Description
10
Automatic duplex unit release
lever
Used to open the automatic duplex unit door when
clearing paper misfeeds
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Automatic duplex unit door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
automatic duplex unit
Upper right-side door release
lever
Used to open the upper right-side door
Center right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
Tray 2
Center right-side door release
lever
Used to open the center right-side door
Lower right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
Tray 3 or 4 or from the LCT
Lower right-side door release
lever
Used to open the lower right-side door when
clearing paper misfeeds
Tray 4/storage tray
Used for storage when the single paper feed
cabinet (tray 3) is installed
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
when the double paper feed cabinet (tray 3 + tray 4)
is installed (See p. 5-15.)
18
19
Tray 3
Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of plain paper
(See p. 5-15.)
Control panel
Used to specify the various settings (See p. 1-38.)
C250P
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
25
24
20
23
22
21
28
27
26
C250P
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional automatic duplex
unit, LCT, and dehumidifier heater installed.
No.
20
Part Name
Description
Power connector
Used for connecting the power cord
21
Dehumidifier heater power switch Used to turn the dehumidifier heater on and off.
Turning on the dehumidifier heater reduces mois-
ture in the paper. This switch is used when the op-
tional dehumidifier heater is installed.
22
23
Filter 2
Collects the toner dust generated in the machine
IEEE1284 port (type C)
Used for connecting the parallel cable from the
computer
24
25
USB port (type B)
USB 2.0/1.1-compliant
Used for connecting a USB cable from the compu-
ter
Network connector
(10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
Used for connecting the network cable when this
machine is used for network printing and network
scanning
26
27
28
Ozone filter
Finisher connector
Filter 1
Collects the ozone generated in the machine
Used for connecting the finisher hookup cord
Collects the toner dust generated in the machine
C250P
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
Part Name
Description
1
Fusing unit cover
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing
unit
2
3
M2 release levers
Used when printing on envelopes. Used when
clearing paper misfeeds in the fusing unit.
Main unit right-side door
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from inside
the main unit
4
5
6
Unlocking knob
Imaging unit
Used when removing the imaging units
Creates the print image
Charger-cleaning tool
Used to clean the electrostatic charger wire, for
example, when incorrect copies are produced (See
p. 7-4.)
7
Print head glass cleaning tool
Used to clean the surface of the print head glass,
for example, when replacing the imaging unit
8
Waste toner box
Collects used waste toner
9
Waste toner box release lever
Total counter
Used when removing the waste toner box
10
Shows the total number of pages that have been
printed
11
12
Locking tab
Used when removing the toner cartridges
Toner cartridges
There are four toner cartridges: cyan (C), magenta
(M), yellow (Y) and black (K). The combination of the
four toners generates full-color images
C250P
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
1
Part Name
Exit tray 1
Upper door
Description
Collects printed pages
2
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds (See
p. 8-31.)
3
4
Horizontal transport unit cover
Hole-punch waste container
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
horizontal transport unit (See p. 8-31.)
Removed when emptying hole-punch waste that
(See p. 7-6.)
5
6
7
8
9
Misfeed-clearing guide
Right-side door
Exit tray 2
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-31.)
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-31.)
Collects copies printed using the “Fold & Staple”
setting
Misfeed-clearing dial in folding
section
section (See p. 8-31.)
Staple cartridge holder
Removed from the stapler unit when clearing
(See p. 6-13, p. 8-46.)
10
11
Misfeed-clearing dial 1
Misfeed-clearing dial 2
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-31.)
Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing
the staple cartridge, or for moving the staple
cartridge holder out to the front (See p. 8-46.)
12
13
14
Stapler unit
Front door
Punch kit*
Pulled out when clearing jammed staples or
replacing the staple cartridge (See p. 6-13,
p. 8-46.)
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds or jammed
staples or when replacing the staple cartridge (See
p. 6-13, p. 8-46.)
Punches holes for filing printed pages when punch
kit is installed onto Finisher
*
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in
the illustration.
C250P
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
No.
Part Name
Description
1
Front door FN4
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
2
Misfeed-clearing dials FN5
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
3
4
5
Exit tray 2
Exit tray 1
Exit tray 3
Collects printed pages
Collects printed pages
Feeds out printed pages when job separator is
installed onto Finisher FS-501
6
Job separator cover
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
job separator (See p. 8-26.)
7
Misfeed-clearing guide FN3
Misfeed-clearing guide FN2
Upper cover FN1
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
8
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
9
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
10
11
Horizontal transport unit cover
Misfeed-clearing guide FN7
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds from the
horizontal transport unit (See p. 8-26.)
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher (See p. 8-26.)
12
13
Stapler
Used to staple pages
Jammed-staple-clearing dial
Turned when clearing jammed staples or replacing
the staple cartridge, or for moving the stapler to the
center (See p. 6-10, p. 8-44.)
C250P
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Saddle stitcher SD-503/Mailbin kit MT-501
4
2
1
3
5
Saddle stitcher SD-503
No.
1
Part name
Description
Print output tray
Misfeed-clearing door
Collects printed pages
2
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
Mailbin kit MT-501
No.
3
Part name
Description
Mailbins
Collects printed pages
4
Misfeed-clearing door
Lever [FN7]
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
Opened when clearing paper misfeeds
5
C250P
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
Finisher FS-514
1
No.
1
Part name
Output tray 1
Output tray 2
Dial [FN6]
Description
Collects prints that are fed out
Collects prints that are fed out
2
3
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
4
5
6
7
8
Dial [FN5]
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
Dial [FN4]
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
Dial [FN2]
Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
Lever [FN1]
Raised when clearing paper misfeeds within the
finisher
Hole-punch waste container
Removed when emptying hole-punch waste
that has accumulated from using the punch set-
tings
9
Lever [FN3]
Stapler
Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within
the finisher
10
11
12
Moved to the front when clearing jammed sta-
ples
Staple cartridge holder
Dial
Removed from the stapler when replacing the
staple cartridge or clearing jammed staples
Turned to move the stapler to the front when
clearing jammed staples
Output tray OT-601
No.
Part name
Description
13
Optional output tray
Collects prints
Punch kit PK-510
No.
Part name
Description
14
Punch Kit*
Punches holes for filing printed pages when
punch kit PK-510 is installed onto finisher FS-
514
*
Parts marked with an asterisk (*) are installed within the finisher and therefore are not shown in
the illustration.
C250P
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
Precautions for using the finisher:
1
-
When moving the finisher, do not grab the exit tray.
-
-
Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit.
Do not place objects below the exit tray of the finisher.
C250P
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Control panel
1
2
Ready
Error
Menu
Select
Cancel
3
6
5
4
No.
Part Name
Description
1
Ready indicator
Lights up when printing is possible and flashes
when data is being received.
2
3
4
5
6
Error indicator
[Cancel] key
Lights up when an error occurs.
Press to cancel printing and other operations.
Press to display the menu and select settings.
Press to change the menu and to enter values.
Displays various screens and messages.
[Menu/Select] key
Cursor keys
Display panel
C250P
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.7
Basic operations
Turning on the machine
1
Set the power switch to
[ n ].
2
Check that the control panel is turned on.
!
Detail
When the machine is turned on, the printer starts up and the message
“Now warming-up.” appears. After the message “Ready to print.” ap-
pears and the Ready indicator lights up, a print job can be received.
The default settings, which are those that are selected immediately after
the machine is turned on, can be changed. For details, refer to “Control
panel” on page 4-2.
The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this
machine was sent from the factory.
Note
The machine takes about 110 seconds to warm up at normal room tem-
perature (73.4°F).
C250P
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Turning off the machine
%
Set the power switch to
[o].
Reminder
When the power switch is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10 sec-
onds to turn it on after turning it off. If there is no wait period between
turning the power switch off, then on again, the machine may not function
properly.
Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while it is making
printing, otherwise a paper misfeed may occur.
Do not turn off the machine with the power switch while a queued job or
stored data is waiting to be printed, otherwise the jobs will be deleted.
!
Detail
The following are cleared when the power switch is turned off.
Settings that have not been programmed
Jobs queued to be printed.
C250P
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Automatically canceling the settings (automatic panel reset)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time while settings are
being changed, settings that have not been programmed are cleared and re-
turn to their defaults.
This is the automatic panel reset operation.
As the factory default, the automatic panel reset operation is performed after
1 minute.
!
Detail
The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed
and whether or not it is performed can be set from the Utility mode. For
details, refer to “User Setting” on page 4-33.
Automatically conserving energy (Low Power mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time the machine auto-
matically enters a mode where it conserves energy.
This is the Low Power mode.
The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Low Power mode after 10 minutes.
Note
When a print job is received, the machine recovers from Low Power
mode and begins printing after it has finished warming up (within 30 sec-
onds at normal room temperature (73.4°F)).
The Low Power mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the
control panel.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be
changed. For details, refer to “User Setting” on page 4-33.
C250P
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
Automatically conserving energy (Sleep mode)
If no operation is performed for a specified length of time, the machine auto-
matically enters a mode where it conserves energy.
Although the machine conserves more energy in Sleep mode than in Low
Power mode, the machine must warm up when Sleep mode is canceled to
begin printing again, therefore taking more preparation time than Low Power
mode.
As the factory default, the machine enters Sleep mode after 15 minutes.
Note
When a print job is received, the machine recovers from Low Power
mode and begins printing after it has finished warming up (within 110
seconds at normal room temperature (73.4 °F)).
The Sleep mode can also be canceled by pressing any key in the control
panel.
!
Detail
The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be changed.
For details, refer to “User Setting” on page 4-33.
Power supply
Be sure to turn off the machine if it is not to be used for a long period of time,
for example, overnight.
In order to ensure that no energy is being consumed, unplug the machine.
C250P
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
1
1.8
Connecting to a computer
Compatible interfaces
The various interfaces that can be used to connect this printer to a computer
are described below.
Ethernet interface
Connect when using this printing system as a network printer.
Supports 10Base-T and 100Base-TX standards. In addition, the Ethernet in-
terface supports the TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, peer-to-peer), IPX/SPX (NetWare),
and AppleTalk (EtherTalk) protocols.
Parallel interface (optional)
Connect when using this printing system as a local printer.
A computer running Windows and an IEEE 1284 parallel cable are required
for connection. Use a parallel cable that uses a terminal with an Amphenol
36-pin male connector.
The parallel interface supports the compatible, nibble, and ECP modes.
USB interface (optional)
Connect when using this printing system as a USB printer.
The USB interface can be connected to a computer running Windows. A
USB cable is required for connection. Use a type A (4 pin, male) or type B (4
pin, male) USB cable. A USB cable measuring 3 meters or less is recom-
mended.
Note
The USB and parallel interfaces cannot be used as the same time.
Change the setting in the “I/F Setting” menu of the “Admin. Setting”
menu.
C250P
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation and operation precautions
Connection diagram
1
The printer cables can be connected to each port at the back of this ma-
chine.
Ethernet
(10Base-T or
100Base-TX)
USB port
Parallel
port
C250P
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Setting up the printer
driver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
2
Setting up the printer driver
2.1
About the provided printer drivers
Printer drivers and supported operating systems
In order to use this printing system, the printer driver must be installed. The
printer driver is a program that controls the processing of data for output. In-
stall the printer driver onto the computer from the provided CD-ROM.
The printer drivers included on the CD and the supported computer operat-
ing systems are listed below. Install the required printer driver.
-
-
-
PCL (PCL XL) Konica Minolta Driver:
Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6a), Win-
dows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows XP Home Edi-
tion, Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2 or later), and Windows
Server 2003
PostScript 3 Emulation Konica Minolta:
Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6a), Windows 2000 Professional (Service
Pack 4 or later), Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (Service Pack 2
or later), Windows XP Professional x64, Windows Server 2003, and Win-
dows Server 2003 x64
PostScript 3 Emulation PPD Driver
Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Mac OS 9.2 or later, Mac OS X 10.2, Mac
OS X 10.3, and Mac OS X 10.4
Note
The User Software CD-ROM contains the PCL printer driver, and the
PostScript Driver CD-ROM contain the PostScript drivers.
C250P
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
System requirements
Check that the computer being connected meets the following conditions.
Windows
-
Operating System:
Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6a or later),
Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows XP Home
Edition (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP Professional (Service Pack
2 or later), or Windows Server 2003
-
-
Processor: Pentium or higher
Memory: Capacity recommended for the operating system
With sufficient memory resources in the operating system and applica-
tion being used
-
-
Drive: CD-ROM
Web Browser (when using PageScope Web Connection):
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later recommended (JavaScript enabled,
Cookies enabled)
Microsoft XML Parser (MSXML) 3.X must be installed when using Internet
Explorer 5.5.
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled, Cookies enabled)
®
®
Macromedia Flash (If “Flash” is selected in View Mode, version 7.0 or
later plugin is required.)
Macintosh
-
Operating System: Mac OS 9.2, Mac OS X 10.2, Mac OS X 10.3, or Mac
OS X 10.4
-
-
-
-
Processor: PowerPC, Intel Processor
Memory: Capacity recommended for the operating system
Drive: CD-ROM
Web Browser (when using PageScope Web Connection):
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled, Cookies enabled)
®
®
Macromedia Flash (If “Flash” is selected in View Mode, version 7.0 or
later plugin is required.)
C250P
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Setting up the system
In order to use this printing system, it must first be set up.
Setup consists of connecting this machine to a computer and installing the
printer driver onto the computer being used.
Setup the printing system as described below.
1
2
Connect this machine to a computer. (Refer to “Connecting to a com-
puter” on page 1-43.)
Install the printer driver. (Refer to “Installing the printer driver” on
page 2-5.)
–
Installation of the printer driver may differ depending on the con-
nection method used with this machine in addition to the operating
system of the computer and the type of printer driver being used.
To update an existing printer driver, delete the existing printer driver
first. For details, refer to “Uninstalling the printer driver” on
–
3
When using a network connection, set up the network. (Refer to “Set-
ting up network printing” on page 2-33.)
–
As necessary, set the interface timeout settings and parallel inter-
face mode (Compatible, Nibble, or ECP) in the I/F Setting menu
from the control panel. When using a parallel or USB port, you must
select the port being used. For details, refer to “Admin. Setting” on
page 4-38.
4
5
Check the setup by printing a test page. (Refer to “Test printing” on
page 2-31.)
Install the screen fonts.
–
–
–
–
The User Software CD-ROM and PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
contain the Latin TrueType fonts as the screen fonts.
Install the screen fronts after adding the operating system standard
fonts. For details, refer to Help of the operating system.
The screen fonts are located in the Screenfont or Screenfonts folder
on the CD-ROM.
To install the Macintosh fonts, install the fonts after decompressing
them.
C250P
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
2.2
Installing the printer driver
When used with Windows
The installation procedure of the Windows printer driver differs depending on
version of Windows that you are using. Refer to the pages indicated below
for the appropriate procedure for installing the printer driver on your compu-
ter.
er” on page 2-7.
98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0” on page 2-13, or “For Windows XP/Server 2003” on
page 2-10.
page 2-16, “For Windows Me/2000” on page 2-17, or “For Windows XP/
Server 2003” on page 2-18.
To install the printer driver using the Add Printer Wizard, refer to “Installing
the printer driver using the Add Printer Wizard” on page 2-10, “For Windows
98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0” on page 2-13, or “For Windows XP/Server 2003” on
page 2-10.
PostScript/PCL (USB connection):
To install the printer driver using Plug and Play, refer to “Installing the printer
driver using Plug and Play” on page 2-16, “For Windows 98SE” on
page 2-16, “For Windows Me/2000” on page 2-17, or “For Windows XP/
Server 2003” on page 2-18.
Note
For details on installing the printer driver in a network environment, refer
to “Setting up network printing” on page 2-33. Because it is necessary to
specify other network settings in advance when installing the printer driv-
er using a network connection, install it using a local connection at this
time.
C250P
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
To install the printer driver on a computer running Windows XP, Windows
Server 2003, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, log on with a user name
registered with Administrator privileges.
To connect this machine to a computer using a parallel connection or a
USB connection, the optional local interface kit is required.
C250P
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Automatic installation using the installer
2
With the installer, this machine is detected to determine whether it is con-
nected by USB or is on the same TCP/IP network as the computer, and then
the required printer is automatically installed. You can also manually specify
the printer driver to be installed.
!
Detail
Since this machine is automatically detected with a network connection,
be sure to set the IP address of this machine before connecting it. For the
setting procedure, refer to “Specifying the TCP/IP settings” on
page 2-37.
For IPP printing, it is not necessary to install the printer driver at this time
since IPP printing setup is performed when the printer driver is installed.
For further details on IPP printing, refer to “IPP printing (Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003)” on page 2-50.
Note
When installing the printer driver on a computer running Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, Administrator
privileges are required.
In order to install this machine on a network with a direct connection us-
ing the TCP/IP protocol, Microsoft TCP/IP must first be installed on the
computer being used if it is running Windows NT 4.0.
If the wizard starts up in order to add new hardware with a USB or parallel
connection, click [Cancel].
Installer operating environment
-
Operating System: Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0 (Serv-
ice Pack 6a or later), Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 4 or later),
Windows XP Home Edition (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP Profes-
sional (Service Pack 2 or later) or Windows Server 2003
-
-
Processor: Pentium 300 MHz or higher recommended
Memory: 64 MB or more (128 MB or more recommended)
C250P
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
To install the printer driver
2
1
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
For the User Software CD-ROM (for a PCL driver), check that the
installer starts up, and then continue with step 2.
For the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM (Win) (for a PS driver),
double-click “UserInst.exe” in the Driver folder on the CD-ROM,
and then continue with step 3.
–
2
3
Click “Printer Install”.
Installation of the printer driver begins.
Click the [AGREE] button if you agree with all terms and conditions of
the license agreement.
–
If you do not agree with the terms and conditions of the license
agreement, the software cannot be installed.
You can change the display language of the installer in the box in
the lower-left corner.
–
4
When the setup selection dialog box appears, click the [Install Printer]
button, and then click the [Next] button.
The connected printer and MFPs are detected.
C250P
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
5
Select this machine and proceed with the installation. Follow the on-
screen instructions to complete the installation.
–
If the connection of this machine cannot be recognized, the list is
not displayed for the parallel connection. When this occurs, select
“Specify the Printer/MFP Except for the Above. (IP Address, Host
Name)”, and the specify this machine directly.
C250P
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Installing the printer driver using the Add Printer Wizard
2
Note
For IPP printing, it is not necessary to install the printer driver at this time
since IPP printing setup is performed when the printer driver is installed.
For further details on IPP printing, refer to “IPP printing (Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003)” on page 2-50.
Note
For details on installing the printer driver in a network environment, refer
to “Setting up network printing” on page 2-33. Because it is necessary to
specify other network settings in advance when installing the printer driv-
er using a network connection, install it using a local connection at this
time.
For Windows XP/Server 2003
1
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
2
Click the [Start] button, and then click “Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
C250P
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
3
For Windows XP, click “Add a printer” on the “Printer Tasks” menu.
For Windows Server 2003, double-click the “Add Printer” icon.
–
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
The Add Printer Wizard starts up.
4
5
Click the [Next] button.
Select “Local printer attached to this computer”, and then click the
[Next] button.
–
Clear the “Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play print-
er” check box.
6
The Select Printer Port dialog box appears. Select “LPT1” here, and
then click the [Next] button.
C250P
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
7
8
9
Click the [Have Disk] button.
Click the [Browse] button.
Specify the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver for
the operating system that you are using, and then click the [OK] button.
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
–
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
10 Click the [OK] button.
The “Printers” list appears.
11 Click the [Next] button.
12 Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the Digital Signature message appears, click the [Continue]
button.
–
When using a network connection, perform a test print after the net-
work settings have been specified.
13 When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed
printer appears in the Printers and Faxes window.
14 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
C250P
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0
2
1
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
2
3
Click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
The Printers window appears.
Double-click the “Add Printer” icon.
The Add Printer Wizard starts up.
4
5
Follow the on-screen instructions.
On the screen for selecting the printer connection, select “Local Print-
er”.
6
7
8
Click the [Next] button.
Click the [Have Disk] button.
Click the [Browse] button.
C250P
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
9
Specify the directory on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver for
the operating system that you are using, and then click the [OK] button.
–
–
–
For Windows 98SE/Me
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
PostScript PPD driver: Folder at Driver\PS-PPD on the PostScript
Printer Driver CD-ROM
For Windows 2000
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
For Windows NT 4.0
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
10 Click the [OK] button.
The “Printers” list appears.
11 Click the [Next] button.
12 Specify the connection port. Select “LPT1” here.
13 Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When using a network connection, perform a test print after the net-
work settings have been specified.
C250P
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
14 When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed
printer appears in the Printers window.
15 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
C250P
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Installing the printer driver using Plug and Play
For Windows 98SE
2
1
After using a parallel cable or a USB cable to connect this machine to
a computer, turn on the computer.
–
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is start-
ing up.
2
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
3
Turn this machine on.
The Add New Hardware Wizard starts up.
4
5
Click the [Next] button.
Select “Search for the best driver for your device (Recommended)”,
and then click the [Next] button.
6
7
Select “Specify a location”, and then click the [Browse] button.
Specify the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver for
the operating system that you are using, and then click the [OK] button.
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
–
PostScript PPD driver: Folder at Driver\PS-PPD on the PostScript
Printer Driver CD-ROM
8
9
Click the [Next] button, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
With a parallel connection, continue with step 10.
–
The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears again. Repeat
steps 4 through 8.
10 When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed
printer appears in the Printers window.
11 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
C250P
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
For Windows Me/2000
1
After using a parallel cable or a USB cable to connect this machine to
a computer, turn on the computer.
–
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is start-
ing up.
2
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
3
Turn this machine on.
–
For Windows Me
The Add New Hardware Wizard starts up.
For Windows 2000
–
The Found New Hardware Wizard starts up.
4
5
Select “Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended)” (for
Windows Me, select “Automatic search for a better driver (Recom-
mended)”), and then click the [Next] button.
For Windows 2000, select “Specify a location”, and then click the
[Next] button.
For Windows Me, select “Specify a Location”, and then click the
[Browse] button.
6
Specify the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver for
the operating system that you are using, and then click the [OK] button.
–
For Windows Me
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
Postscript PPD: Folder at Driver\PS-PPD on the PostScript Printer
Driver CD-ROM
–
For Windows 2000
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
7
8
Click the [OK] button (for Windows Me, click the [Next] button), and
then follow the on-screen instructions.
Click the [Finish] button.
C250P
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
9
When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed
printer appears in the Printers window.
10 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
For Windows XP/Server 2003
1
After using a parallel cable or a USB cable to connect this machine to
a computer, turn on the computer.
–
Do not disconnect or connect the cable while the computer is start-
ing up.
2
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
3
Turn this machine on.
–
The Add New Hardware Wizard starts up.
If the Add New Hardware Wizard does not appear, turn this ma-
chine off, then on again.
–
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before
turning it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normal-
ly.
4
5
6
Select “Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)”, and then
click the [Next] button.
Under “Search for the best driver in these locations”, select “Include
this location in the search”, and then click the [Browse] button.
Depending on the operating system and printer driver that you are us-
ing, specify the folder on the CD-ROM that contains the printer driver,
and then click the [OK] button.
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
–
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
7
Click the [Next] button, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the Digital Signature dialog box appears, click the [Continue]
button.
C250P
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
8
9
Click the [Finish] button.
When installation is complete, make sure that the icon of the installed
printer appears in the Printers and Faxes window.
10 Remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
This completes the printer driver installation.
C250P
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Uninstalling the printer driver
2
If it becomes necessary to delete the printer driver, for example, when you
want to reinstall the printer driver, follow the procedure below to delete the
driver.
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
In the Printers window (for Windows XP/Server 2003, Printers and Fax-
es window), select the icon of the printer that you want to delete.
Press the [Delete] key on the computer keyboard to delete the printer
driver.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
–
When the printer driver has been deleted, the printer icon will dis-
appear from the Printers window (for Windows XP/Server 2003,
Printers and Faxes window).
–
–
For Windows 98SE/Me/NT 4.0, this completes the uninstallation
procedure.
For Windows 2000/XP/Sever 2003, delete the driver from the server
properties.
5
6
7
Click the “File” menu, and then click “Server Properties”.
Click the Driver tab.
Select the printer driver to be deleted from the “Installed Printer Driv-
ers” list, and then click the [Delete] button.
8
9
On the Deletion Confirmation dialog box, click the [Yes] button.
Close the Print Server Properties dialog box and Printers window (for
Windows XP/Server 2003, “Printers and Faxes” window).
10 Restart the computer.
C250P
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
Be sure to restart the computer.
Even if the printer driver is deleted using the method described above,
the model information file will remain in the computer. Therefore, the driv-
er may not be able to be overwritten when reinstalling the same version
of the printer driver. When installing the same version of the printer driver,
be sure to also delete the files described below.
Check the “C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\w32x86” folder and
delete the folder of the corresponding model if it is available. If the Konica
Minolta PCL driver and Konica Minolta PostScript driver are both in-
stalled, the model information of both drivers is deleted. If one driver is
remaining, do not delete it.
Delete the “oem*.inf” and “oem*.PNF” files in the “C:\WINDOWS\inf”
folder. (The asterisk (*) in the file name displays a number, and the
number varies according to the environment of the computer.) Before de-
leting the files, open the INF file, check that the model name is described
in the last several lines, and then check that the file of the corresponding
model is available.
The PNF file is the same number as the INF file.
When used with Macintosh
The installation procedure for the Macintosh printer driver differs depending
on the Mac OS version and printer driver being used. Refer to the table below
for the appropriate procedure for installing the printer driver on your Macin-
tosh computer.
Mac OS
Printer Driver
Refer to
Mac OS X 10.2,
Mac OS X 10.3 and
Mac OS X 10.4
PostScript PPD
“Installing the printer driver” on page 2-22
Mac OS 9.2 or later PostScript PPD
“For Mac OS 9.2” on page 2-27
C250P
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Installing the printer driver
For Mac OS X
2
1
Turn the Macintosh computer on.
Quit all running applications that may have started when the Mac-
intosh computer was turned on.
–
2
3
4
Insert the Macintosh printer driver CD-ROM into the Macintosh com-
puter’s CD-ROM drive.
Open the OS10_2_x or OS_3_x folder in English\Driver on the CD-
ROM.
Select the folder for the Mac OS version being used, and then copy the
driver file onto the desktop.
–
–
–
Mac OS X 10.2: KONICAMINOLTA_C250_102.pkg
Mac OS X 10.3: KONICAMINOLTA_C250_103.pkg
Mac OS X 10.4: KONICAMINOLTA_C250_103.pkg
5
6
Double-click the file copied onto the desktop.
–
–
Enter the requested administrator’s name and password.
For the administrator’s name and password, contact your network
administrator.
–
To quit the installation, click the [Cancel] button.
Click the [Continue] button and follow the on-screen instructions until
the Installation dialog box appears.
C250P
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
On the Installation dialog box, click the [Continue] button.
2
7
–
From the second time the printer driver is installed, the [Install] but-
ton may appear as the [Upgrade] button.
The printer driver is installed onto the Macintosh computer. When in-
stallation is complete, a message appears.
8
Click the [Close] button.
This completes the printer driver installation.
Next, select the printer.
C250P
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Selecting a printer
Note
If connecting using AppleTalk, the AppleTalk settings on this machine
must be specified. For specifying the AppleTalk settings, refer to “Print-
ing with Macintosh” on page 2-64.
If connecting using Bonjour with Mac OS X 10.4, the Bonjour settings
must be specified on this machine. For specifying the Bonjour settings,
refer to “Printing with Macintosh” on page 2-64.
If connecting using Rendezvous with Mac OS X 10.3, the Bonjour set-
tings must be specified on this machine. For specifying the Bonjour set-
tings, refer to “Printing with Macintosh” on page 2-64.
For Mac OS X
After connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer, it can be used as a
printer by selecting it in Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility as the printer
to be used.
1
2
Open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility, located in “Applications”—
“Utilities” of “Hard Disk”.
When the Add Printer dialog box appears, click the [Add] button. When
the printer list appears, click the [Add] button.
–
–
–
For Mac OS X 10.4, proceed to step 3.
For Mac OS X 10.2 and Mac OS X 10.3, proceed to step 4.
If usable printers have already been set up, the Add Printer dialog
box does not appear.
3
If this machine appears as a printer of a Bonjour connection, select
“KONICA MINOLTA” from the “Print Using” drop-down list, select
“KONICA MINOLTA C250 PS(P)” in the model list, and then click the
[Add] button.
–
If the selected printer is registered in the printer list, this completes
the setting procedure.
C250P
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
–
When connecting with AppleTalk and this machine does not appear
as a printer, click the [More Printers] button, and then proceed to
step 4.
4
5
Select the applicable connection method and printer name.
–
To specify an AppleTalk zone for an AppleTalk connection, select
“Local AppleTalk Zone”.
–
When “IPP” is selected as the protocol in IP Printer, the text box for
entering the queue name appears.
For Mac OS 10.3, leave the queue name text box empty.
For Mac OS 10.4, enter “ipp” in the queue name text box.
Select “KONICA MINOLTA” from the “Printer Model” drop-down list.
C250P
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
6
Select “KONICA MINOLTA C250 PS(P)”, and then click the [Add] but-
ton.
The selected printer is registered in the printer list.
C250P
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
For Mac OS 9.2
After connecting this machine, it can be used as a printer by selecting the
PostScript printer from the Chooser and by specifying the printer description
(PPD) file.
First, copy the printer description (PPD) file onto the Macintosh computer.
1
Insert the Macintosh printer driver CD-ROM into the Macintosh com-
puter’s CD-ROM drive.
2
3
Open the OS 9_x folder in English\Driver on the CD.
Select the KONICAMINOLTAC250UVxxx.ppd file, and then copy it into
the Printer Description File folder in Hard Disk\System Folder\Exten-
tions.
Next, select a printer.
The printer driver can use a standard Macintosh LaserWriter.
4
5
On the Apple menu, click “Chooser”.
Make sure that “AppleTalk” is set to “Active”, and then click the “La-
serWriter” icon.
6
From the “Select a PostScript Printer” list, click the applicable printer
for the printing system, and then click the [Create] button.
The PostScript printer description (PPD) file selection screen appears.
What should be done if a different PPD file has already been select-
ed?
?
% Click the [Setup] button, and then click the [Select PPD] button
from the screen that is already displayed.
C250P
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
7
Select the applicable PPD file, and then click the [Select] button or the
[Open] button.
The setting screen for adding Options appears.
8
In the Options Installed 1 and Options Installed 2 panes, select the op-
tions that are installed on this machine.
9
Click the [OK] button.
The Chooser window appears again.
10 Close the Chooser window.
C250P
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Uninstalling the printer driver
2
If it becomes necessary to delete the printer driver, for example, when you
want to reinstall the printer driver, follow the procedure below to delete the
driver.
Note
Quit all running applications that may have started when the Macintosh
computer was turned on.
For Mac OS X
1
2
Open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility, located in Hard Disk\Appli-
cations\Utilities.
Select the name of the printer to be deleted, and then click the [Delete]
button.
The selected printer is deleted.
3
4
Close the printer list.
Drag the following file, which is located at Hard Disk\Library\Print-
ers\PPDs\Contents\Resources\en.lproj, to the “Trash” icon.
–
KONICA MINOLTA C250.gz
5
6
Delete the unnecessary files from Library\Printers.
For Mac OS 10.3 and Mac OS 10.4, drag the “***c250” data, which is
located in Library\Printers\ KONICAMINOLTA\filter, and the following
files, which are located in Library\Printers\KONICAMINOLTA\PDEs, to
the “Trash” icon.
–
–
–
–
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Finishing.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 ImageLayout.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Security.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Setup.plugin
7
For Mac OS 10.2, drag the following files, which are located in Li-
brary\Printer\PPD Plugins, to the “Trash” icon.
–
–
–
–
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Finishing.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 ImageLayout.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Security.plugin
KONICAMINOLTAC250 Setup.plugin
C250P
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Enter “/usr” in Go\Go to folder to open to the “/usr” folder, and then
2
drag the “***c250” folder, which is located in libexec\cups\filter, to the
“Trash” icon.
8
Restart the Macintosh computer.
This completes the uninstallation procedure.
For Mac OS 9.2
1
Drag the KONICAMINOLTAC250UVxxx.ppd file, which is located in
Hard Disk\System Folder\Extensions\Printer Descriptions, to the
“Trash” icon.
The related printer driver files are deleted.
2
Restart the Macintosh computer.
This completes the uninstallation procedure.
C250P
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
2.3
Printing operations
For Windows
Printing is possible when the printer driver is installed and the network set-
tings have been specified. Print jobs are specified from the application soft-
ware.
Printing operation
1
2
Open the data in the application, click “File”, and then click “Print”.
Check that the printer name has been selected in “Printer Name” or
“Select Printer” drop-down list.
–
–
3
4
Specify the page range and the number of copies to print.
Click the [Preferences] button or the [Properties] button to change the
printer driver settings as necessary.
–
By clicking the “Preferences” button or the “Properties” button on
the Print dialog box, you can specify settings for each model from
the printer driver dialog box that appears. For details, refer to “Set-
ting up the PCL driver” on page 3-5, “Setting up the PostScript
driver (Windows)” on page 3-41, or “Setting up the PPD driver (Win-
dows)” on page 3-68.
–
If the changed settings are not saved in the Print dialog box, the
original settings are restored when the application is exited.
5
Click the [Print] button.
The Data indicator of this machine flashes.
Test printing
Printing is possible when the printer driver is installed and the network set-
tings have been specified. To check that a connection has been made prop-
erly, you can print the standard Windows test page. Print a test page from
the printer driver Properties dialog box.
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
C250P
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
–
If “Printers and Faxes” does not appear in the Start menu, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select “Printers and Other Hard-
ware”, and then select “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
Click the General tab, and then click the [Print Test Page] button or the
[Print Test] button.
The test page is printed and the confirmation dialog box appears.
4
Check the printout, and then click the [OK] button or the [Yes] button.
Note
If the test page is not printed properly, check that the printer driver has
been installed properly and that the network settings have been specified
correctly.
For Macintosh
Printing is possible when the printer driver is installed and the network set-
tings have been specified. Print jobs are specified from the application soft-
ware.
Printing operation
1
Open the data in the application, click “File”, and then click “Print”.
The Print dialog box differs depending on the application.
2
3
Check that the printer name has been selected in the “Printer” drop-
down list.
Specify the print range and the number of copies to print, and then
click the [Print] button.
The Data indicator of this machine flashes.
C250P
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
2.4
Setting up network printing
Overview of network functions
Network functions
By connecting this machine to a network through the Ethernet port, this
printing system can be used as a network printer.
This printing system supports 10Base-T and 100Base-TX standards. In ad-
dition, the Ethernet interface supports the TCP/IP (LDP/LPR, IPP, SMB), Net-
BEUI (SMB), IPX/SPX (NetWare), and AppleTalk (EtherTalk) protocols.
Note
When setting up the network, the administrator password is required to
enter Administrator mode.
Ask the administrator of this machine for the administrator password.
C250P
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Features of the network functions
2
This printing system is equipped with the following network functions to flex-
ibly support various network environments.
-
-
-
Automatic selection of 10Base-T or 100Base-TX (Fast Ethernet)
Obtains the IP address automatically from DHCP or BOOTP
Printing with SMB printing (Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)
You can print in Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows
XP, or Windows Server 2003 using SMB.
-
-
Printing with LPR printing (Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003)
You can print with LPD/LPR using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Win-
dows XP, or Windows Server 2003. Windows 98SE and Windows Me
cannot be used.
LPR (Line Printer Request): This print request system can be used under
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
Enter the queue name as [Print].
Printing with Port 9100 (Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)
You can print (Raw print) using Port 9100 under Windows 98SE, Win-
dows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.
When using a Port 9100 connection under Windows 98SE or Windows
Me, it may be necessary to install the Peer to Peer Printing Tool.
To obtain the Peer to Peer Printing Tool, consult the dealer where you
purchased this machine.
-
-
Supports Novell NetWare Pserver and Rprinter (Nprinter)
Supports the Novell NetWare print server functions and supports both
bindery mode and Novell Directory Service (NDS)
With NetWare
The Novell NetWare 4.x—6 print server functions are supported.
You can connect this printing system to a network using Novell NetWare
4.x—6 as the network operating system and send print jobs from the client
to the print server (network controller). The three modes supported are as fol-
lows:
-
-
-
Nprinter
Pserver
NDPS
Note
For details on the NetWare functions, refer to the NetWare operation
manual.
C250P
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
With Macintosh
2
You can print from your Macintosh computer using LPR, AppleTalk or Bon-
jour/Rendezvous.
You can connect this printing system to a print server in an AppleTalk or Bon-
jour/Rendezvous environment and send print jobs from the Macintosh com-
puter to this machine.
Network connection methods that can be selected in each Windows op-
erating system
This chapter describes the settings that must be specified for network print-
ing.
Setting procedures differ depending on the method of networking printing
used (SMB, LPR, or IPP printing). Select the best method of network printing
for your Windows environment.
Network printing from a Windows operating system
Proto-
col Used dows
98SE
Win-
Win-
dows
Me
Win-
dows
2000
Win-
Win-
Win-
dows XP dowsNT dows
4.0
Server
2003
SMB Print-
ing
TCP/IP,
NetBEUI
o
o
o
o
o
LPR Printing TCP/IP
IPP Printing TCP/IP
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Port 9100
Printing
TCP/IP
+*
+*
*
When using Port 9100 printing under Windows 98SE or Windows Me, it may be necessary to
install the Peer to Peer Printing Tool. For details, refer to the table below.
Conditions when the Peer to Peer Printing Tool must be installed while using
Port 9100
Operating System
Windows 98SE/Me
Using installer
Windows 2000/XP/2003
Driver type
Not using in-
staller
Using installer
Not using in-
staller
*1
*4
Konica Minolta
PCL
Not required
Required
Not required
*2
-
Konica Minolta
PostScript
*3
-
*2
-
PostScript PPD
Required
C250P
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
*1
If the printer driver is installed using the installer while this machine is con-
automatically, and Port 9100 is created.
*2
The printer driver is not compatible with the operating system.
*3
*4
Not required since standard operating system functions are used.
To obtain the Peer to Peer Printing Tool, consult the dealer where you pur-
chased this machine.
To specify the driver settings when installing the Peer to Peer Printing Tool,
page 2-46.
When using SMB printing, you can perform network printing without install-
ing software such as the Peer to Peer Printing Tool. For details, refer to “SMB
printing” on page 2-41.
Reminder
Before setting up network printing, install the printer driver. For details on
installing the printer driver, refer to “Installing the printer driver” on
page 2-5.
To perform network printing, change the printer port for the installed
printer driver to one for a network connection, and then change the set-
tings on this machine as necessary. For an IPP connection, it is neces-
sary to install the printer driver first.
Network printing in a NetWare environment
NetWare Version
NetWare 4.x
Protocol Used
Emulation
NDS/Bindery
NDS
Service Mode
Pserver/Nprinter
Pserver
IPX
NetWare 5.x/6
IPX
TCP/IP
NDPS(lpr)
C250P
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Specifying the TCP/IP settings
First, assign the IP address from the machine’s control panel.
1
2
Press the [Menu/Select] key on this machine’s control panel, touch [↑]
or [↓] to display the Admin. Setting screen, and then touch [→].
Enter the administrator password, and then press the [Menu/Select]
key.
–
To enter the password, touch [↑] or [↓] to select the desired value,
and then touch [←] [→] to enter the next digit.
3
Touch [↑] or [↓] to display the Network Setting screen, and then touch
[→].
4
5
Touch [↑] or [↓] to display the TCP/IP screen, and then touch [→].
Specify settings for “TCP/IP Setting” and “IP def. method”.
–
Touch [↑] or [↓] to display the setting, and then touch [→] to switch
to the setting display. To change the setting, press the [↑] or [↓] key.
To enter a numeric value, press the [↑] or [↓] key to change the
number of one digit at a time, and press the [←] or [→] key to move
to a different digit. After entering all digits, press the [Menu/Select]
key.
–
TCP/IP Setting: Select whether or not TCP/IP is used.
C250P
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
–
IP def. method: Select whether the “Auto Input” or “Direct Input”
method is used to specify the IP address. If “Direct Input” is select-
ed, specify settings for “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask”, and “Default
Gateway”.
6
To apply the settings, restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
–
When turning the machine off, then on again, wait at least 10 sec-
onds to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may
not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned
off.
Turn this machine back on to apply the IP address.
C250P
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
The network settings should be specified according to instructions from
the network administrator.
A password is required in order to enter Administrator mode. Contact the
administrator for the administrator password.
!
Detail
Although the IP address is entered without using the DHCP server in the
procedure described here, it is also possible that the IP address automat-
ically be assigned by the DHCP server. When “IP def. method” is set to
“Auto Input” and “DHCP Setting” is set to “Enable”, the IP address, sub-
net mask and default gateway are automatically assigned by the DHCP
server on the network, so it is not necessary to assign them manually.
However, consider the following when setting “DHCP Setting” to “Ena-
ble”.
Consult with the network administrator to check that a DHCP server ex-
ists. If a DHCP server does not exist, be sure to specify settings for “IP
Address”, “Subnet Mask” and “Default Gateway”.
If the IP address and other settings have been assigned by the DHCP
server, they may automatically be changed. If the IP address and other
settings are changed and a printer on the network has been specified by
its IP address for printing, printing may not be possible since this ma-
chine cannot communicate with the network.
If “DHCP Setting” has been set to “Enable”, it is recommended that a
fixed IP address be assigned to this machine in the DCHP server settings.
C250P
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Accessing PageScope Web Connection
2
Setting the IP address for this machine enables you to access PageScope
Web Connection.
Use your Web browser to directly access PageScope Web Connection.
1
2
Start up the Web browser.
In the “Address” bar, enter the IP address for this machine as shown
below, and then press the [Enter] key.
http://<IP_address_for_this_machine>/
Example: If the IP address for this machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
The initial page of PageScope Web Connection appears.
!
Detail
For further details on PageScope Web Connection, refer to “Using Pag-
eScope Web Connection” on page 9-2.
C250P
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
SMB printing
You can use SMB printing (Windows printing) to print directly over the Micro-
soft network from computers running Windows 98SE or Windows Me.
Operations on this machine
Set the IP address for this machine. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Specifying the TCP/IP settings” on page 2-37.
In PageScope Web Connection, specify the settings described below for
Windows printing.
1
Start up PageScope Web Connection.
–
To logout if the login page does not appear, click the [Logout] but-
ton.
2
In the login page, select [Administrator], and then click the [Login] but-
ton.
3
4
Enter the administrator password, and login to Administrator mode.
On the Network tab, click “SMB Setting”, and then click “Print Setting”
in the sub-menu that appeared.
C250P
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
5
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
SMB Print: Set whether to use the SMB printing service. Select
“ON” here.
NetBIOS Name: Specify the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters,
including the following: -).
Print Service Name: Specify the printing service name (up to 12
characters, excluding the following: / \).
Work Group: Specify the work group name (up to 15 characters, ex-
cluding the following: " \ ; : , * < > | + = ?).
6
To apply the settings, restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
Reminder
When turning the power switch OFF then ON, wait for 10 seconds or
longer before turning it ON again; otherwise the machine may not func-
tion normally.
C250P
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Printer driver settings (For Windows 98SE/Me)
2
1
2
3
4
Click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
On the Details tab, click the [Add Port] button.
Select “Network”, and then click the [Browse] button. In the network
configuration window that appears, select the appropriate printer icon.
Printer driver settings (For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003)
1
For Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and
then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” does not appear in the Start menu, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select “Printers and Other Hard-
ware”, and then select “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
Click the [Add Port] button on the Ports tab, double-click “Local Port”
or select “Local Port” and click the [New Port] button, and then enter
“\\<NetBIOS_name>\<printing_service_name>”.
–
Enter the same NetBIOS name and printing service name that you
entered in PageScope Web Connection. For the setting procedure,
refer to “Operations on this machine” on page 2-41.
4
Click the [Close] button to apply the setting.
C250P
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
LPR printing
The LPR print service is supported as a standard in Windows 2000, Windows
XP, Windows NT 4.0, and Windows Server 2003. TCP/IP is used as the net-
work protocol.
Operations on this machine
%
Set the IP address for this machine.
–
For the setting procedure, refer to “Specifying the TCP/IP settings”
on page 2-37.
Printer driver settings (For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003)
1
For Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and
then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
On the Ports tab, click the [Add Port] button.
In the “Available Printer Ports” list, select “Standard TCP/IP Port”, and
then click the [New Port] button.
5
6
When the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts up, click the
[Next] button.
In the “Name of printer or IP address” box, enter the IP address for this
machine, and then click the [Next] button.
7
8
Select “Custom”, and then click the [Settings] button.
Select “LPR”, enter “Print” in the “Queue Name” box, and then click the
[OK] button.
–
The capital letters and lowercase letters must be entered correctly.
9
Click the [Next] button, and then click the [Finish] button to apply the
setting.
C250P
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Printer driver settings (For Windows NT 4.0)
2
1
2
3
4
Click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
On the Ports tab, click the [Add Port] button.
In the “Available Printer Ports” list, select “LPR Port”, and then click the
[New Port] button.
–
If “LPR Port” is not in the list, click the [Start] button, point to “Con-
trol Panel”, and then click “Network”. Then, on the Service tab, click
the [Add] button and install the Microsoft TCP/IP Printing service.
5
6
In the “Name or address of server providing lpd” box on the Add LPR
Compatible Printer dialog box, enter the IP address for this machine.
In the “Name of printer or print queue on that server” box, enter “Print”.
–
The capital letters and lowercase letters must be entered correctly.
7
Click the [OK] button to apply the setting.
C250P
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Port 9100 printing (Windows 98SE/Me/2000/XP/Server 2003)
The Port 9100 print service is supported as a standard in Windows 2000,
Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. TCP/IP is used as the network pro-
tocol. When using Port 9100 printing under Windows 98SE or Windows Me,
it may be necessary to install the Peer to Peer Printing Tool. For details on
the conditions when the Peer to Peer Printing Tool must be installed, refer to
“Network connection methods that can be selected in each Windows oper-
ating system” on page 2-35.
Operations on this machine
Set the IP address for this machine. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Specifying the TCP/IP settings” on page 2-37.
Printer driver settings (Windows 2000/XP/server 2003)
When using Port 9100 to print, change the printer driver port to “9100”.
1
For Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and
then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
On the Ports tab, click the [Add Port] button.
In the “Available Printer Ports” list, select “Standard TCP/IP Port”, and
then click the [New Port] button.
5
6
7
When the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard starts up, click the
[Next] button.
In the “Name of printer or IP address” box, enter the IP address for this
machine, and then click the [Next] button.
Select “Custom”, and then click the [Settings] button.
C250P
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
8
9
Click [RAW], and then enter the RAW port number (the default setting
is “9100”) in the Port Number box.
Click the [Next] button, and then click the [Finish] button to apply the
setting.
Note
If the RAW port is not specified to be used in the TCP/IP setting, printing
cannot performed.
C250P
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Installing the Peer to Peer Printing Tool to connect using Port 9100 (Win-
dows 98SE/Me)
To obtain the Peer to Peer Printing Tool in order to install it for connecting
using Port 9100 under Windows 98SE or Windows Me, consult the dealer
where you purchased this machine.
To connect to the network using Port 9100, install the Peer to Peer Printing
Tool, and then specify the driver settings described below.
!
Detail
To uninstall the Peer to Peer Printing Tool, delete the printer driver using
the Peer to Peer port first, and then delete the Peer to Peer Tool in “Add
or Remove Programs” in the “Control Panel”.
Note
If multiple printer drivers are connected to the network and use the Peer
to Peer Printing Tool, all printer drivers connected to the network with the
Peer to Peer Printing Tool can no longer be connected to the network if
the Peer to Peer Printing Tool is uninstalled.
C250P
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Printer driver settings when the Peer to Peer Printing Tool is installed to
connect using Port 9100 (Windows 98SE/Me)
After the Peer to Peer Printing Tool is installed to connect using Port 9100
under Windows 98SE or Windows Me, the printer driver port must be
changed to the Peer to Peer port.
1
Click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
2
3
4
Right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
On the Details tab, click the [Add Port] button.
Click “Others”, select “KONICA MINOLTA Peer to Peer Port” from the
list, and then click the [OK] button.
The Peer to Peer setup dialog box appears. The printer connected to
the network is automatically detected.
5
Select the printer from the device list, enter the port number, and then
click the “Add Port” button.
–
–
The port is added. Skip to step 8.
If the desired printer does not appear in the device list, proceed to
step 6.
6
7
Click the [Manual setup] button.
Enter the TCP/IP or IPX setting for the network being connected, and
then click the “Add Port” button.
–
The port is added. Skip to step 8.
8
9
Click the [OK] button when the confirmation message appears.
The port is added.
Click the [OK] button to complete the operation.
C250P
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
IPP printing (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003)
2
The IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) print service is supported as a standard
in Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. TCP/IP is used
as the network protocol.
Operations on this machine
Set the IP address for this machine. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Specifying the TCP/IP settings” on page 2-37.
Also, specify the IPP printing settings in PageScope Web Connection. (Print-
ing can be performed with the default settings.)
1
Start up PageScope Web Connection.
–
To logout if the login page does not appear, click the [Logout] but-
ton.
2
In the login page, select [Administrator], and then click the [Login] but-
ton.
3
4
Enter the administrator password, and login to Administrator mode.
On the Network tab, click “IPP Setting”.
C250P
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Specify settings for the following:
2
5
–
–
IPP Setting: Set whether to perform IPP printing. Select “ON” here.
Printer Name: Specify the printer name (up to 127 alphanumeric
characters).
–
–
–
Printer Location: Specify the printer location (up to 127 alphanu-
meric characters).
Printer Information: Specify the printer manufacturer details (up to
127 alphanumeric characters).
Printer URI: The URl of the printer that can be used for IPP printing
is displayed.
–
–
–
Support Operation: Specify print operations supported by IPP.
Accept IPP Job: Set whether to use the IPP reception function.
IPP Authentication Setting: Specify the authentication method, user
name, and password for the IPP connection.
Installing the printer driver
For IPP printing, reinstall the printer driver.
1
Insert the Windows printer driver CD-ROM into the computer’s CD-
ROM drive.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: PostScript Printer Driver CD-
ROM
2
For Windows 2000, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and
then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
3
For Windows 2000/Server 2003, double-click the “Add Printer” icon.
For Windows XP, click “Add a printer” on the “Printer Tasks” menu.
The Add Printer Wizard starts up.
4
5
Click the [Next] button.
In the Local or Network Printer dialog box, select “Network printer”,
and then click the [Next] button.
6
In the Locate Your Printer dialog box, select “Connect to a printer on
the Internet or on your intranet”.
C250P
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
7
In the “URL” field, enter the URL for this machine in the following for-
mat, and then click the [Next] button.
–
http://<IP_address_for_this_machine>/ipp
Example: If the IP address for this machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/ipp
8
9
When the confirmation dialog box appears, click the [OK] button.
Click the [Have Disk] button.
10 Click the [Browse] button, specify the folder on the CD-ROM that con-
tains the printer driver, and then click the “OK” button.
–
–
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on
the PostScript Printer Driver CD-ROM
11 Check that the printer name is displayed in the “Printers” list, and then
click the [Next] button.
12 Select whether to set the printer as the default printer, and then click
the [Next] button.
13 Click the [Finish] button to exit the Add Printer Wizard.
Note
Once the settings for the printer have been specified, you can use the
printer in the same way as a default local printer. Also, if you set up the
printer for sharing in Windows, it can be used as a network printer by oth-
er Windows computers over the network.
C250P
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Printing with NetWare
The printer controller supports the following environments.
Network printing in a NetWare environment
NetWare Version
NetWare 4.x
Protocol Used
Emulation
NDS/Bindery
NDS
Service Mode
Pserver/Nprinter
Pserver
IPX
NetWare 5.x/6
IPX
TCP/IP
NDPS(lpr)
For remote printer mode with NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation
Before using bindery emulation, check that bindery emulation is compatible
with the NetWare server.
1
From a client computer, log on with Supervisor permissions to access
the NetWare server where Pserver is registered.
2
3
Start up Pconsole.
From the “Available Options” list, select “Quick Setup”, and then click
the [Enter] button.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the “Printer Server Name”, “Printer
Name”, “Print Queue Name”, and “Print Queue Volume” fields, select
“Other/Unknown” from the “Printer type” field, and then save the spec-
ified settings.
5
6
Click the [Esc] button to quit Pconsole.
Use the NetWare server console to load PSERVER.NLM.
C250P
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
7
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select “Net-
Ware Setting” from the Network tab, and then specify the following set-
tings.
–
–
IPX Setting: Select “ON”.
Ethernet Frame Type: Select “Auto Detect”. (Select the frame type
according to the network environment.)
–
–
–
NetWare Print Mode: Select “Nprinter/Rprinter”.
Printer Name: Specify the printer name.
Printer Number: Specify the printer number (0-255). When 255 is
specified, the setting is “Auto”.
8
9
Restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
Use the NetWare server console to display the print server screen, and
then check that the created printer is shown as “Waiting for Job” for
the connected printer (0).
C250P
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
For queue user privileges, the printer notification option, assignment of
multiple queues, and passwords, refer to the NetWare documentation,
and specify settings as necessary.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
For print server mode with NetWare 4.x Bindery Emulation
Before using bindery emulation, check that bindery emulation is compatible
with the NetWare server.
1
From a client computer, log on with Supervisor permissions to access
the NetWare server where Pserver is registered.
2
3
Start up Pconsole.
From the “Available Options” list, select “Quick Setup”, and then click
the [Enter] button.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the “Printer Server Name”, “Printer
Name”, “Print Queue Name”, and “Print Queue Volume” fields, select
“Other/Unknown” from the “Printer type” field, and then save the spec-
ified settings.
5
Click the [Esc] button to quit Pconsole.
C250P
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
6
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select “Net-
Ware Setting” from the Network tab, and then specify the following set-
tings.
–
–
IPX Setting: Select “ON”.
Ethernet Frame Type: Select “Auto Detect”. (Select the frame type
according to the network environment.)
–
–
–
NetWare Print Mode: Select “Pserver”.
Print Server Name: Specify the print server name created in step 4.
Print Server Password: Specify only when setting from the NetWare
server. (Displayed by “----”.)
–
–
–
Polling Interval: Specify “1”. (Change as necessary.)
Bindery/NDS Setting: Select “NDS/Bindery”.
File Server Name: Specify the name of the file server that connects
to the Pserver.
7
8
Restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
Use the NetWare server console to load MONITOR.NLM.
C250P
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Select the connection information and, in the active connection col-
2
9
umn, check that the created Pserver is connected.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
For NetWare 4.x remote printer mode (NDS)
1
2
3
Log on to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
Start up NWadmin.
Select either the organization or organizational unit container that of-
fers the print service, and then click “Print Services Quick Setup” on
the “Tools” menu.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the “Printer Server Name”, “Printer
Name”, “Print Queue Name”, and “Print Queue Volume” fields, select
“Other/Unknown” from the “Printer type” field, and then save the spec-
ified settings.
C250P
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
5
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select “Net-
Ware Setting” from the Network tab, and then specify the following set-
tings.
–
–
IPX Setting: Select “ON”.
Ethernet Frame Type: Select “Auto Detect”. (Select the frame type
according to the network environment.)
–
–
–
NetWare Print Mode: Select “Nprinter/Rprinter”.
Printer Name: Specify the printer name.
Printer Number: Specify the printer number (0-255). When 255 is
specified, the setting is “Auto”.
6
7
8
Restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
Use the NetWare server console to load PSERVER.NLM.
Use the NetWare server console to display the print server screen, and
then check that “C250P” (the created printer) is shown as “Waiting for
Job” for the connected printer (0).
C250P
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
For queue user privileges, the printer notification option, assignment of
multiple queues, and passwords, refer to the NetWare documentation,
and specify settings as necessary.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
For NetWare 4.x/5.x/6 Print Server mode (NDS)
To use the Print Server mode, the IPX protocol must be loaded on the Net-
Ware server.
1
2
3
Log on to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
Start up NWadmin.
Select either the organization or organizational unit container that of-
fers the print service, and then click “Print Services Quick Setup (non-
NDPS)” on the “Tools” menu.
4
Enter the appropriate names in the “Printer Server Name”, “Printer
Name”, “Print Queue Name”, and “Print Queue Volume” fields, select
“Other/Unknown” from the “Printer Type” field, and then click the [Cre-
ate] button.
C250P
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
5
In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection, select
“NetWare Setting” from the Network tab, and then specify the following
settings.
–
–
IPX Setting: Select “ON”.
Ethernet Frame Type: Select “Auto Detect”. (Select the frame type
according to the network environment.)
–
–
–
NetWare Print Mode: Select “Pserver”.
Print Server Name: Specify the print server name created in step 4.
Print Server Password: Specify only when setting from the NetWare
server. (Displayed by “----”.)
–
–
–
Polling Interval: Specify “1”. (Change as necessary.)
Bindery/NDS Setting: Select “NDS”.
NDS Context Name: Specify the name of the context that connects
to Pserver.
–
NDS Tree Name: Specify the name of the tree that Pserver logs on
to.
6
7
Restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
Use the NetWare server console to load MONITOR.NLM.
C250P
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
8
Select the connection information and, in the active connection col-
umn, check that the created Pserver is connected.
Note
For queue user privileges, the printer notification option, assignment of
multiple queues, and passwords, refer to the NetWare documentation,
and specify settings as necessary.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
For NetWare 5.x/6 Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS)
Before specifying settings for NDPS, check that the NDPS broker and NDPS
manager have been created and loaded.
Also, before performing the following procedure, check that the TCP/IP pro-
tocol has been set in the NetWare server, and check that the IP address has
been set for this machine and that this machine is on.
1
2
3
Log on to NetWare as an administrator from a client computer.
Start up NWadmin.
Right-click the organization or organizational unit container where you
will create the printer agent, and then click “NDPS Printer” on the “Cre-
ate” sub-menu.
4
5
In the “NDPS Printer Name” box, enter the printer name.
In the “Printer Agent Source” column, select “Create a New Printer
Agent”, and then click the “Create” button.
6
7
8
Check the printer agent name, and then in the “NDPS Manager Name”
box, browse through the NDPS manager names, and register one.
In the “Gateway Types”, select “Novell Printer Gateway”, and then reg-
ister it.
In the Configure Novell PDS for Printer Agent window, select “(None)”
for the printer type and “Novell Port Handler” for the port handler type,
and then register the settings.
C250P
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
In “Connection type”, select “Remote (LPR on IP)”, and then register it.
2
9
10 Enter the IP address set for this machine as the host address, enter
“Print” as the printer name, and then click the [Finish] button to register
the settings.
11 The printer driver registration screen appears. Select “None” for each
operating system to complete the registration.
Note
For queue user privileges, the printer notification option and assignment
of multiple queues, refer to the NetWare documentation, and specify set-
tings as necessary.
Specifying client (Windows) settings when using the NetWare server
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” is not displayed in the Start menu, click
“Control Panel” in the Start menu, double-click “Printers and Other
Hardware”, and then double-click “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0/Server 2003, double-click the
“Add Printer” icon.
For Windows XP, click “Add a printer” on the “Printer Tasks” menu.
The Add Printer Wizard starts up.
In the port settings, browse the network, and specify the name of the
created queue (or NDPS printer name).
C250P
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
4
In the “Printer Model” list, specify the folder on the CD-ROM that con-
tains the printer driver for the operating system used.
–
For Windows 98SE/Me
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\PS-PPD on the PostScript Print-
er Driver CD-ROM
–
For Windows NT4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003
Konica Minolta PCL driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250_C250P on
the User Software CD-ROM
PostScript driver: Folder at Driver\bizhubC250 on the PostScript
Printer Driver CD-ROM
5
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
C250P
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Printing with Macintosh
2
This section describes this machine’s settings and the Macintosh network
settings.
Specify the printer network port settings after installing the printer driver and
when selecting a printer. To select a printer, refer to “Selecting a printer” on
page 2-24.
Operations on this machine
Set the IP address for this machine. For the setting procedure, refer to
“Specifying the TCP/IP settings” on page 2-37.
In PageScope Web Connection, specify the AppleTalk or Bonjour settings.
Specifying the AppleTalk settings
When connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using AppleTalk,
the AppleTalk settings must be specified.
1
Start up PageScope Web Connection.
–
To log out if the login page does not appear, click the [Logout] but-
ton.
2
3
In the login page, select [Administrator], and then click the [Login] but-
ton.
Enter the administrator password, and log in to the Administrator
mode.
C250P
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
4
On the Network tab, click “AppleTalk Setting”.
5
6
Specify settings for the following:
AppleTalk: Set whether to use AppleTalk. Select “ON” here.
Printer Name: Specify the printer name (up to 31 alphanumeric charac-
ters).
Zone Name: Specify the zone being connected to (up to 31 alphanu-
meric characters).
To apply the settings, restart this machine (turn it OFF, then ON again).
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
C250P
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
Specifying the Bonjour settings
2
When connecting this machine to a Macintosh computer using Bonjour/Ren-
dezvous, the Bonjour settings must be specified.
1
Start up PageScope Web Connection.
–
To log out if the login page does not appear, click the [Logout] but-
ton.
2
In the login page, select “Administrator”, and then click the [Login] but-
ton.
3
4
5
Enter the administrator password, and login to the Administrator mode.
On the Network tab, click “Bonjour Setting”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
Bonjour: Specify whether to use a Bonjour/Rendezvous connec-
tion. Select “ON” here.
Bonjour Name: Specify the Bonjour name that is to appear as the
connected device name (up to 63 alphanumeric characters and
symbols).
6
To apply the settings, restart this machine (turn it off, then on again).
C250P
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
Note
The Bonjour connection is a Mac OS X 10.4 function, it is the same func-
tion as the Rendezvous connection in Mac OS 10.3 or earlier.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, wait for 10 seconds or longer before turn-
ing it on again; otherwise the machine may not function normally.
Specifying Macintosh settings
Use the Macintosh computer that is connected to specify the TCP/IP and
AppleTalk settings.
Reminder
For network settings, consult the network administrator.
For printer driver installation, refer to “Installing the printer driver” on
page 2-22.
Since Bonjour (a Mac OS X 10.4 function) is always enabled, it is not re-
quired to change the settings. Bonjour/Rendezvous is a Mac OS X func-
tion. For Mac OS 9.2, connect using AppleTalk.
For Mac OS X
1
2
3
4
5
On the Apple menu, select “System Preferences”.
Click the “Network” icon.
From “Show”, select “Built-in Ethernet”.
Click the TCP/IP tab.
Select the items from “Configure” that correspond to the network set-
tings for the Macintosh computer that is connected to the network, and
then set the IP address and subnet mask.
6
If using an AppleTalk connection, click the AppleTalk tab, and then
check that the “Make AppleTalk Active” check box is selected.
C250P
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
7
8
Click the close button in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.
The “Apply configuration changes?” message appears.
Click the [Apply] button.
The changed settings are saved.
C250P
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
For Mac OS 9.2
1
On the Apple menu, point to “Control Panel”, and then click “Apple-
Talk”.
2
3
4
5
From the “Connect via” drop-down list, select “Ethernet”.
On the Apple menu, point to “Control Panel”, and then click “TCP/IP”.
From the “Connect via” drop-down list, select “Ethernet”.
Select the items from “Configure” that correspond to the network set-
tings for the Macintosh computer that is connected to the network, and
then set the IP address and subnet mask.
6
7
Click the close button in the upper-left corner of the dialog box.
The “Save changes to the current configuration?” message appears.
Click the [Save] button.
C250P
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up the printer driver
2
C250P
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Specifying printer driver
settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3
Specifying printer driver settings
3.1
Specifying the printer driver basic settings
The settings specified for the functions of this machine when printing can
only be applied while using the application. When the application is exited,
the settings return to their default settings.
When registering the settings, change the printer driver basic settings (de-
fault settings) or use the function for saving settings.
For Windows
The functions of this machine that can be used when printing can be speci-
fied in the printer driver setup dialog box, which can be displayed from the
Printers window (for Windows XP/Server 2003, Printers and Faxes window).
Settings specified in the printer driver setup dialog box displayed using the
procedure described below will be applied when printing from any applica-
tion.
To display the printer driver setup dialog box
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” does not appear in the Start menu, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select “Printers and Other Hard-
ware”, and then select “Printers and Faxes”.
2
For Windows 98SE/Me, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and
For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, right-click the icon of the installed
printer, and then click “Printing Preferences”.
For Windows NT 4.0, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and
then click “Document Default”.
For the settings that can be specified with each printer driver, refer to the fol-
lowing:
-
-
Konica Minolta PCL Driver: “Setting up the PCL driver” on page 3-5
Konica Minolta PostScript Driver: “Setting up the PostScript driver (Win-
dows)” on page 3-41
-
PostScript PPD Driver: “Setting up the PPD driver (Windows)” on
page 3-68
C250P
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
For details on saving settings, refer to the following pages.
Konica Minolta PCL driver: “Saving the driver settings” on page 3-39
Konica Minolta PostScript driver: “Saving the driver settings” on page 3-65
To specify custom settings, click “Print” in the application, and then click the
[Preferences] button on the Print dialog box. The settings specified on the
Print dialog box apply only to the current file.
C250P
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
For Macintosh
The functions of this machine that can be used when printing can be speci-
fied on the Print dialog box or the Page Setup dialog box.
The settings can only be applied while using the application. When the ap-
plication is exited, the settings return to the default settings.
To program the settings, save the settings from the printer driver dialog box-
es.
For Mac OS X:
The settings in the Print dialog box are saved by saving them as a preset.
The settings in the Page Setup dialog box are saved by selecting “Save as
Default” from the “Settings” drop-down list.
!
Detail
For details on saving the settings, refer to “Saving the driver settings” on
page 3-108.
For Mac OS 9.x:
The settings in the Print dialog box are saved by clicking the [Save Settings]
button.
Note
The settings in the Page Setup dialog box cannot be saved.
The General settings in the Print dialog box cannot be saved.
For the settings that can be specified with each printer driver, refer to the fol-
lowing:
-
-
OS X: “Setting up the PPD driver (Mac OS X)” on page 3-90
OS 9.2: “Setting up the PPD driver (Mac OS 9.2)” on page 3-76
C250P
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3.2
Setting up the PCL driver
Selecting the printer
Before printing, specify the model name for this machine.
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
Click the Option tab.
From the “Model” drop-down list, select “C250P”.
Note
If the model name for this machine is not specified from the Option tab,
the appropriate printer driver functions cannot be used. Be sure to spec-
ify the settings before printing.
C250P
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Settings
Common settings
The following describes the common settings and buttons that are displayed
on all tabs.
Common setting items
Button
Function
OK
Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings
that have been changed.
Cancel
Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed
and close the dialog box.
Help
Click this button to display the help for each item on the cur-
rently displayed dialog box.
Save/Restore Setting
Restore Defaults
Click this button to save the current settings and to view them
at a later time.
Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which
were selected when the driver was installed.
C250P
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Button
Function
View
When “Paper” is selected, a preview of the page layout as
specified in the current settings is displayed and a preview im-
age of the print job can be checked.
When “Printer” is selected, a printer figure is displayed showing
any options, such as the paper tray, that are installed on this
machine.
Printer
Paper
Note
To enable any installed options, you must specify the Option settings. For
details, refer to “Specifying the Option tab settings” on page 3-37.
Setup tab
Item
Function
Paper
Specifies the orientation of the original document, original
size, output size, paper source, and paper type.
Binding
Specifies the folding format such as the binding position,
double-sided printing, booklet printing, printing multiple
pages on one page, file margin, stapling, or hole punch-
ing.
Output
Specifies the output format such as the output method,
number of copies, exit tray, collating, or offset.
Per Page Setting tab
Item
Function
Front Cover Page
Back Cover Page
Per Page Setting
Attaches a front cover page.
Attaches a back cover page.
Inserts paper between pages and switches simplex/du-
plex and paper for each page.
Chapter
Specifies the page to be printed on the front side.
C250P
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Overlay tab
3
Item
Function
Overlay
Specifies overlay printing.
Watermark tab
Item
Function
Watermark
Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the document being
printed.
Distribution Number Stamping
Copy Protect
Prints the number of the copy.
Protect Prints a special pattern and prevents copying.
Quality tab
Item
Function
Select Color
Original Image Type
Specifies the color for printing.
Specifies the contents of the original document. Prints
with a quality suitable for the original document.
Quality Adjustment
Adjusts the image quality. You can select “Simple” to ad-
just entire documents and “Detailed” to adjust the charac-
ters, photos, and charts of each document.
Pattern
Selects the print pattern.
Font tab
Item
Function
Use Printer Fonts
Selects whether to use TrueType fonts or the printer fonts
when printing.
Download Font Format
Selects whether the fonts are downloaded to the printer
as bitmap or outline.
FAX tab
This tab is not used on this machine.
Version tab
Item
Function
Version
Displays the version of the printer driver.
C250P
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Option tab
3
Item
Function
Option
Specifies the options that are installed on this machine.
Option Information
Model
Automatically specifies the printer driver option settings.
Specifies the model to be used.
Note
To display the Option tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003, right-
click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
C250P
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Setup tab settings
3
Printing to suit the paper size
You can enlarge or reduce documents created when printing to match the
output paper size.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Original Size” and “Output Size” drop-down lists, select the
desired settings.
–
You can also specify any enlargement or reduction ration in the
“Zoom” box.
Note
If the paper size is other than the custom size, select the desired settings
after specifying the settings in Custom Size.
When “W” is selected for each standard paper size in the printer driver,
the data can be centered and printed.
For example, if 8 1/2 × 11 size data is created and you want to center and
print on 11 × 17 size paper, specify “8 1/2 × 11 W” as the paper size in
the printer driver and specify “Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray” as the paper
source.
C250P
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
To print, load 11 × 17 paper in the tray (“Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray”) that is
specified in the printer driver, and then select “Paper Tray” in the control
panel and follow the steps described below to specify the paper size for
the paper tray that is used.
Select [8 1/2 × 11 W].
Enter the 11 × 17 paper size in [Oversize Paper].
C250P
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Specifying a custom size
A custom size can be specified and saved in advance as described below.
1
From the “Original Size” or “Output Size” drop-down list, select “Cus-
tom Size Settings”.
The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears.
2
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
List of Custom Sizes: Select the size for the custom size being set.
Custom Size Name: Input the name of the custom size being regis-
tered.
–
Size: Specify the width and length of the custom size according to
the selected measurement units.
3
Click the [OK] button.
Note
The custom size settings can only be specified from the printer driver set-
up dialog box, which can be displayed from the Printers window (Printers
and Faxes window for Windows XP/Server 2003).
If using long paper, specify the size of the long paper in Custom Size. For
details, refer to “Printing on Banner Paper” on page 9-35.
C250P
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Selecting the paper source
When changing the paper type, you can specify it for an paper tray and select
the paper tray according to the desired paper type.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Paper Source” drop-down list, select the paper tray that
contains the paper to be used.
Assigning a paper type to a paper tray
Follow the procedure described below to assign a paper type to a paper tray.
1
2
Click the [Paper Type Settings] button.
Select the “Paper Source” being changed, and then click the [Edit Pa-
per Type] button.
3
Select the desired setting from the “Paper Type” drop-down list, and
then click the [OK] button.
Only the paper types that can be selected for each paper tray are dis-
played.
C250P
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
–
–
If “Transparency” is selected as the paper type, you can specify
transparency interleaving.
When the “Transparency Interleave” check box is selected, the
Transparency Interleave Settings dialog box appears, allowing you
to select the source of the interleaf paper.
–
The Transparency Interleave Settings dialog box can also be dis-
played by clicking the [Settings] button.
Note
“Thick 1”, “Thick 2”, and “Thick 3” cannot be selected for Tray 2, Tray 3,
Tray 4, and LCT.
Letterhead paper can only be selected when optional auto duplex unit is
installed.
Specifying Double-sided/Booklet printing
You can print a document onto both sides of a page or in a booklet format
(two facing pages). This comes in handy when you want to bind multiple-
page documents.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Print Type” drop-down list, select “Double-sided” or “Book-
let”.
Note
The binding orientation can be specified from the “Binding Position”
drop-down list.
The double-sided printing function and booklet function are available
only when the optional auto duplex unit is installed.
C250P
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Printing multiple pages on one page (N in 1)
3
You can print multiple document pages on one page. This comes in handy
when you want to reduce the number of output pages.
1
2
3
Click the Setup tab.
Select the “Combination” check box.
From the “Combination” drop-down list, select the number of pages to
be printed on one page.
To change the border line and printing order settings, select “Details”,
and then change the settings in the dialog box that appears.
Note
When printing a job that contains pages of different sizes and orienta-
tions, images may be missing or overlapping when the document is print-
ed.
C250P
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Setting the file margin
File margins are added to the document before it is printed.
Click the Setup tab.
Select the “File Margin” check box.
1
2
3
To set the width of the file margin, click the [Details] button, and then
specify the desired settings in the File Margin Details dialog box that
appears.
–
–
Front Side/Back Side: Specifies the file margin values. By clearing
the “Save Value for Front and Back Sides” check box, you can
specify separate values for the front and back sides.
Shift Mode: To add a file margin, select how the image is to be shift-
ed.
Note
When “Double Sided” is selected in “Print Type” and “Auto Reduction” is
specified in Shift Mode in the File Margin Details dialog box, the reduction
ratio according to the larger value of the file margin width is used from the
values specified in Front Side/Back Side.
C250P
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Stapling
Multiple-page documents can be stapled.
Click the Setup tab.
Select the “Staple” check box.
1
2
3
From the drop-down list, select the number of staples and the stapling
position.
Note
The staple function is available only when the optional Finisher is in-
stalled.
Note
Depending on the selected Binding Position setting, different stapling po-
sitions are available.
The number of staples that can be selected varies depending on the fin-
isher that is installed.
When optional finisher FS-501 is installed, “1 staple” can be set. When
optional finisher FS-603 or FS-514 is installed, “1 staple” or “2 staples”
can be set.
Hole punching
Holes can be punched into the printed document.
1
2
3
Click the Setup tab.
Select the “Hole-Punch” check box.
From the drop-down list, select whether two or three holes are to be
punched.
Note
The hole punch function is available only when optional finisher FS-603
and punch kit PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and
punch kit PK-510 are installed.
C250P
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Fold & staple
You can specify the center binding process of a document.
Click the Setup tab.
Select the “Fold & Staple” check box.
1
2
3
To specify the settings in “Fold & Staple”, click the [Details] button, and
then specify the desired settings in the Fold & Staple Details dialog box
that appears.
Fold & Staple: Specifies the conditions for center binding and folding.
Center Erase: Specifies not to print on the folded part of a document.
Note
“Fold & Staple” is available if optional finisher FS-603 or if saddle stitcher
SD-503 is installed on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
“Center Erase” is available only if finisher FS-603 is installed.
The “Fold & Staple” check box cannot be selected if the “Staple” or
“Hole-Punch” check box has been selected.
The available center binding and folding settings differ depending on the
finisher that is installed. When FS-514 is installed, in addition to “Fold &
Staple” (which folds the documents in half before stapling them), “Center
Staple” (which binds documents with staples at the center) and “Fold”
(which folds documents in half) are available. When FS-603 is installed,
only “Fold & Staple” is available.
C250P
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Selecting the output method
Not only can you print directly, but you can select “Secured Print”, which re-
quires a password to print, or “Save in User Box”, which saves documents
in the HDD.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Output Method” drop-down list, select the output method.
–
–
Print: Select this setting to print immediately.
Secure Print: Select this setting to save the document to be printed
in the secured box of this machine. In order to print, you will be re-
quired to enter the user ID and password from this machine’s con-
trol panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential
documents.
–
–
–
Save in User Box: Select this setting to save the document to be
printed in a box on this machine.
Save in User Box and Print: Select this setting to save the docu-
ment in a box and print it at the same time.
Proof and Print: Select this setting to temporarily stop printing after
part of the document has been printed. Select this setting to avoid
misprinting large print jobs.
Note
If the password rules have been enabled on the machine, specify a pass-
word that contains 8 digits.
Secured Printing
If “Secure Print” was selected, enter the secure print ID and password in the
dialog box that appeared.
Note
To print the document, select “Secure Print” in the Job Operation menu
of the machine’s control panel, and then enter the ID and password. For
details, refer to “Managing print jobs” on page 9-25.
C250P
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Save in User Box
3
When “Save in User Box” or “Save in User Box and Print” is selected, specify
the file name and user box number in the dialog box that appears for entering
the file name and user box number.
Note
To print the document, enter the box number and password in the Job
Operation menu of the machine’s control panel. For details, refer to
“Managing print jobs” on page 9-25.
When a print job is sent, this machine stops printing temporarily after part of
the document has been printed. The remaining print job is stored in this ma-
chine as a print job. When printing multiple copies, you can print the remain-
ing part of the print job after checking the print results.
Note
To print the document, select it in the Job Operation menu of the ma-
chine’s control panel. For details, refer to “Managing print jobs” on
page 9-25.
C250P
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying Account Track settings
3
If account track settings have been specified on this machine, you must en-
ter department name and password.
1
2
3
Click the Setup tab.
Click the [User Authentication/Account Track] button.
Select the “Account Track” check box, and then enter the department
name and password.
–
A default password can be registered and used rather than entering
a password for each job.
4
Click the [OK] button.
Note
Printing is not possible if a print job is sent using an account name or
password that is not registered with the account track settings of the ma-
chine or if a job is sent without the “Account Track” check box selected.
Even a registered account cannot print if it is not given printing permis-
sions.
For details on account management, contact the administrator of this
machine.
C250P
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Per Page Setting tab settings
3
Printing documents with a front cover/back cover
1
2
3
Click the Per Page Setting tab.
Select the “Front Cover Page” and “Back Cover Page” check boxes.
To print on the front cover and back cover, select “Printed”. To only
add a blank page, select “Blank”.
4
Select the paper tray loaded with the paper for the front cover and back
cover.
C250P
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Printing multiple pages
The “Per Page Setting” function comes in handy when you want to change
the paper tray during a print job when printing multiple pages.
Chapter
You can specify the page that you want to print on the front side when duplex
printing or booklet printing.
Even if a specified page comes up to be printed on the back side in duplex
printing or booklet printing, the specified page is moved and printed on the
front side.
1
2
3
Click the Per Page Setting tab.
Select the “Chapter” check box.
Enter the page number of the page you want to print on the front side.
Note
Enter the page number using single-byte numerals.
When entering multiple page numbers, separate the page numbers with
commas such as “2, 4, 6” or enter a page range using a hyphen such as
“6-10”.
Per Page setting
You can specify the print type and paper tray for each page.
1
2
3
Click the Per Page Setting tab.
Select the “Per Page Setting” check box.
From the “List Name” drop-down list, select the name of the desired
list.
–
When changing the list name, click the [Edit List Name] button after
selecting the list name, and then apply the settings on the dialog
box that appears.
C250P
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
4
Click the [Add] button, and then specify the page number, print type,
and paper source in the dialog box that appears.
Note
For an existing list, click the [Edit] button to change the selected page
settings, or click the [Delete] button to delete them.
Click [↑] or [↓] to change the page number starting with the smallest page
number.
C250P
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Overlay tab settings
3
Printing different original documents together (Overlay)
An original document can be printed on top of form data that was created
separately. This function is handy for fax cover letters and form letters.
1
2
3
Create the print data using any application.
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select the printer in the “Select Printer” drop-down list, and then click
the [Properties] button or the [Preferences] button.
4
5
Click the Overlay tab.
Select “Print Overlay”.
C250P
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
6
From the list, select the form that you want to print.
7
8
Select the file name, and then click the [OK] button.
The Print dialog box appears again.
Click the [OK] button.
Overlay printing is performed.
Note
You must pre-register forms to be printed. For details, refer to “Editing
forms” on page 3-27.
C250P
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Editing forms
To use forms, the data for using forms must be registered in advance. To reg-
ister a form, select “Create Overlay”, and then specify the document that you
want to register.
1
2
3
Create the form data using any application.
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select the printer in the “Select Printer” drop-down list, and then click
the [Properties] button or the [Preferences] button.
4
5
Click the Overlay tab.
Select the “Create Overlay”.
6
Click the [Browse Files] button.
C250P
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
7
Specify the storage location for the form data, and then enter the file
name in the “File name” box.
8
9
Click the [Save] button.
Select the file, and then click the [OK] button.
The Print dialog box appears again.
10 Click the [OK] button.
–
Instead of executing a print job, the form data is saved. The file ex-
tension is “.kmf”.
Note
When the overlay data that was created consists of multiple pages, the
first page of data is registered as an overlay.
From the Overlay tab, the selected form data can be deleted by clicking
the [Delete Overlay File] button.
C250P
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Watermark tab settings
3
Printing a watermark
You can print specific text in the background as a watermark.
1
2
3
4
Click the Watermark tab.
Select the “Watermark” check box.
From the drop-down list, select the watermark that you want to print.
Specify the desired settings for “Type” and “1st Page Only”.
–
–
Overwrite: The background of the watermark is printed in white.
Transparent: The background of the watermark is transparent.
C250P
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Editing a watermark
You can change the fonts and position of the watermark, and you can regis-
ter a new watermark.
1
2
3
4
Click the Watermark tab.
Select the “Watermark” check box.
Click the [Edit] button.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
[Add]: Click to enter a new watermark in the watermark text box.
[Delete]: Click to delete the selected watermark.
Watermark Text: Enter the text to be printed as a watermark.
Font Settings: Specify the font and character size.
Text Angle: Specify the watermark print angle.
Position: Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to specify the
watermark position.
–
Text Color: Specify the watermark text color.
C250P
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Printing the document number
When printing multiple copies, you can print the number of each document.
1
2
3
Click the Watermark tab.
Select the “Distribution Number Stamping” check box.
Specify settings for the following:
–
Pages to Print: Specify the pages where the numbering is to be
printed.
–
–
Starting Number: Specify the starting number.
Color: Specify the color of the number to be printed.
Note
The “Numbering” check box is not available if the “Collate” check box is
not selected on the Setup tab.
C250P
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Copy protect
You can print a special pattern on an entire page while printing.
When copying a printed page, the characters embedded in the pattern ap-
pear to prevent an illegal copy.
1
2
3
4
Click the Watermark tab.
Select the “Copy Protect” check box.
Click the [Edit] button.
Specify each setting, and then click the [OK] button.
Type of Copy Protect: Specify the pattern to be embedded with copy pro-
tection. You can specify multiple types from “Stamp/Character”, “Date/
Time”, and “Serial Number”.
-
Stamp/Character: Embeds the selected character string in a pattern. A
preregistered character string (common stamp) or a character string reg-
istered on this machine (registered stamp) can be specified.
-
-
Date/Time: Embeds the selected date and time in a pattern.
Serial Number: Embeds the serial number of this machine in a pattern.
C250P
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Detail Setting: Specifies the color and density pattern to be embedded with
copy protection, and specifies the embedding method.
-
-
-
-
-
-
Color: Select the pattern print color.
Density: Select the pattern print density.
Pattern: Select the pattern.
Pattern Contrast: Select the pattern contrast.
Pattern Size: Select the pattern size.
Pattern Overwrite: Select whether to print the pattern over the text of a
document or print in the blank spaces.
Angle: Select the pattern angle.
-
C250P
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Quality tab settings
3
Quality tab parameters
Item
Function
Select Color
Select the color for printing.
Color: Select this setting to print in color.
Grayscale: Select this setting to print in grayscale.
2 Color: Select this setting to print the two colors selected from
the drop-down list.
Original Image Type
Select the contents of the original document to print with a
quality suitable for the original document.
Document: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for
documents containing mostly text.
Photo: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for pho-
tos.
DTP: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for doc-
uments produced using a DTP application.
WEB: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for Web
page printing.
CAD: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for CAD
data printing.
Quality Adjustment
Pattern
Adjust the image quality.
Simple: Select this setting to adjust the entire document.
Detailed: Select this setting to separately adjust the text, pho-
tos, and charts in the document.
Select the print pattern.
C250P
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Specifying settings
1
2
Click the Quality tab.
Specify each setting.
To adjust the quality, select “Simple” or “Detailed”, and then click the [Set-
tings] button beside the desired setting. In the Quality Adjustment Settings
dialog box that appears, specify the brightness and color balance.
To adjust the quality, select “Detailed”, and then click the [Settings] button
beside “Figure/Table/Graph”. In the Quality Adjustment Settings dialog box
that appears, you can specify the color settings and screen/smoothing set-
tings, and the corresponding text or photo settings.
C250P
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Font tab settings
3
Replacing fonts
You can replace the TrueType fonts used in Windows with the printer fonts
of this machine.
1
2
3
4
Click the “Font” tab.
Select the “Use Printer Fonts” check box.
Select the TrueType font that you want to replace.
From the “Printer Font to Use” drop-down list, select the printer font to
replace the TrueType font.
5
Click the [OK] button.
Note
Using the printer fonts will shorten the printing time, however, there may
be a difference in the screen display and the print results.
To download the TrueType fonts when not using the printer fonts, select
the font type to be downloaded to the printer from the “Download Font
Format” drop-down list.
C250P
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Option tab settings
3
Select the name of the model and specify whether or not options are installed
so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer
driver.
Note
If the installed options are not set from the Option tab, the function for the
option cannot be used with the printer driver. When installing options, be
sure to specify the correct settings.
Selecting options
1
For Windows 98SE/Me/2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to
“Settings”, and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” does not appear in the Start menu, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select “Printers and Other Hard-
ware”, and then select “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the printer icon, and then click “Properties”.
Click the Option tab.
From the “Model” drop-down list, select the name of the model being
used.
C250P
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
5
From the drop-down lists for the options, select the name of the option
that is installed.
Note
To automatically set the installed options, enter the printer name or IP ad-
dress of this machine in the “Printer Name or IP Address” box under “Op-
tion Information”, and then click the [Gather Option Information] button.
The [Gather Option Information] button can only be used when the SNMP
setting is enabled on this machine and the SNMP v1/v2c (IP) setting
check box is selected.
When the Mail Bin Kit is installed, you can assign output tray 1 and output
tray 2 as mail bins.
To assign the output destination of the mail bins, select “Bin Setting”
from “User Setting” — “Output Setting” on the control panel.
If “Printer” is displayed when specifying the output destination in the
printer driver, the mail bin that is selected is shown in the figure.
C250P
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Saving the driver settings
With PCL drivers, you can save the new settings of the driver and recall them
as necessary.
To save the driver settings
1
2
Change the driver settings in the Setup tab and the Per Page Setting
tab.
Click the [Save/Restore Setting] button, and then select “Save Current
Setting”.
3
Enter the file name in the “Name” text box.
C250P
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
4
5
Enter a message in the “Comment” text box as necessary.
Specify a folder in the “Save Location” box, and then click the [OK] but-
ton.
The settings are registered in a library.
Note
The file extension is “.ksf”.
You can save up to 25 sets of settings in the library.
Up to 40 characters can be entered in the “Name” text box. In Windows
98SE/Me, you can enter up to 40 characters.
Up to 512 characters can be entered in the “Comment” text box. In Win-
dows 98SE/Me, you can enter up to 512 characters.
Viewing the settings
1
Click the [Save/Restore Setting] button on the Printing Preferences di-
alog box, and then select “Restore Saved Setting”.
From the “Library” list, select the desired settings file.
Click the [OK] button.
2
3
The settings are recalled and displayed in the Printing Preferences di-
alog box.
Deleting the settings
1
Click the [Save/Restore Setting] button on the Printing Preferences di-
alog box, and then select “Edit Library”.
2
3
From the “Library” list, select the desired settings file to be deleted.
Click the [Delete] button.
Note
Even if the settings file is deleted from the “Library” list, it will remain on
the HDD of your computer. By specifying the file name in “Save Setting
File in Library”, you can save it in the “Library” list.
C250P
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3.3
Setting up the PostScript driver (Windows)
Selecting the printer
Before printing, specify the model name for this machine.
1
For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”,
and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the icon for the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
Click the Option tab.
Select “Model” from the “Option” list, and then select “C250P” from
the “Setting” drop-down list.
Note
If the model name for this machine is not specified from the Option tab,
the appropriate printer driver functions cannot be used. Be sure to spec-
ify the settings before printing.
C250P
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Settings
Common settings
The following describes the common settings and buttons that are displayed
on all tabs.
Common setting items
Button
Function
OK
Click this button to close the dialog box and apply any settings
that have been changed.
Cancel
Help
Click this button to cancel any settings that have been changed
and close the dialog box.
Click this button to display the help for each item on the cur-
rently displayed dialog box.
Save
Click this button to save the current settings and to view them
at a later time.
Edit
Click this button to change the saved settings.
Default
Click this button to return the settings to their defaults, which
were selected when the driver was installed.
C250P
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Button
Function
View
When the [Paper View] button is clicked, a preview of the page
layout as specified in the current settings is displayed and a
preview image of the print job can be checked.
When the [Printer View] button is clicked, a printer figure is dis-
played showing any options, such as the paper tray, that are in-
stalled on this machine.
Printer
Paper
Note
To enable any installed options, you must specify the Option settings. For
details, refer to “Specifying the Option tab settings” on page 3-62.
Setup tab
Item
Function
Orientation
Original Size
Output Size
Specifies the orientation of the image being printed on the paper.
Specifies the size of the original document.
Specifies the output paper size. Automatically enlarges or reduces
when the Original Size setting is changed.
Zoom
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Selects the paper source for printing.
Paper Source
Paper Type
Copies
Selects the paper type for printing.
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Collate
Specifies whether to print multiple copies in sets.
When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set.
Selects the tray where the printed pages are fed to.
Offset
Output Tray
Output Method
Specifies output methods, such as “Secured Print” and “Save in
User Box”.
User Authentication/
Account Track
Specifies department names and passwords.
C250P
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Layout tab
3
Item
Function
Combination
You can print multiple document pages on one page. Details can be
specified by clicking the [Combination Details] button.
Rotate 180
Prints the image rotated 180°.
Specifies double-sided printing.
Specifies the binding position.
Specifies stapling.
Double Sides
Binding Position
Staple
Center Staple and Fold
Center Erase
Hole-Punch
Specifies the folding settings.
Does not print on the folded part of the center binding.
Specifies hole punching.
Per Page Setting tab
Item
Function
Front Cover Page
Paper Source
Attaches a front cover page.
Selects the paper tray for the front cover.
Attaches a back cover page.
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
Back Cover Page
Paper Source
Transparency Interleave
Outputs and inserts interleafs when printing overhead projector
transparencies.
Paper Source
Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves.
Watermark tab
Item
Function
Watermark
Prints a watermark (text stamp) on the page being printed. Water-
marks can be added, changed, or deleted.
Transparent
1st Page Only
Repeat
Prints the watermark with a transparent background.
Prints the watermark on the first page only.
Prints several watermarks on a single page.
Quality tab
Item
Function
Original Image Type
Specifies the contents of the original document.
Prints with a quality suitable for the original document.
Select Color
Specifies the color for printing.
Quality Adjustment
Adjusts the image quality. You can select “Simple” to adjust the en-
tire document or “Detailed” to separately adjust the text, photos,
and charts in the document.
C250P
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Item
Function
Download Font Format
Selects the TrueType font type to download when downloading the
TrueType fonts and not using the printer fonts.
Use Printer Fonts
Select to enable the substitution setting of the printer fonts. If ena-
bled, the TrueType fonts to be substituted are not downloaded to
the printer.
Advanced tab
Item
Function
Advanced Printing
Features
Specifies whether to enable detailed print functions (booklet).
PostScript Output Op-
tions
Specifies the PostScript file output format.
Send PostScript Error
Handler
Specifies whether to print an error report when a PostScript error oc-
curs.
Mirrored Output
Reverses horizontally, then prints.
PostScript Pass Through Allows applications to print directly without using GDI.
Device Settings tab
Item
Function
Font Substitution Table
Specifies the replacement of TrueType fonts with printer fonts.
Specifies the usable PostScript memory size.
Available PostScript
Memory
Output Protocol
Specifies the protocol for transmitting to the printer.
Specifies whether to reset the printer before printing.
Send CTRL-D Before
Each Job
Send CTRL-D After Each Specifies whether to reset the printer after printing.
Job
Covert Gray Text to Post- Specifies whether to convert gray text in a document to PostScript
Script Gray
gray.
Covert Gray Graphics to Specifies whether to convert gray graphics in a document to Post-
PostScript Gray Script gray.
Add Euro Currency Sym- Specifies whether to convert the Euro currency symbol in a docu-
bol to PostScript Fonts
ment to PostScript fonts.
Job Timeout
Stops printing when a print job is not completed within the specified
time.
Wait Timeout
Stops printing when the printer does not receive data within the
specified time from when the job was sent.
Minimum Font Size to
Downloaded as Outline
Specifies the minimum font size (pixels) when downloading
TrueType fonts as outline fonts. Fonts smaller than the minimum
specified size are downloaded as bitmap fonts.
Maximum Font Size to
Download as Bitmap
Specifies the maximum font size (pixels) when downloading
TrueType fonts as bitmap fonts. Fonts larger than the maximum
specified size are downloaded as outline fonts.
C250P
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
To display the Device Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server
2003, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Proper-
ties”.
Option tab
Item
Function
Option
Specifies the options that are installed on this machine.
Gather Option Informa-
tion
Communicates with this machine and reads the status of the in-
stalled options.
PageScope Web Con-
nection
Starts up PageScope Web Connection.
Note
To display the Device Information tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server
2003, right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Proper-
ties”.
You cannot click the [Gather Option Information] button if you are not
connected to or able to communicate with this machine.
Settings tab
Item
Function
Display Constraint
Message
Displays a message when you want to perform a function that can-
not be set when the printer driver is being used.
Use Print Server
Properties Form
Uses the added registered paper in [Server Properties].
Note
To display the Settings tab in Windows 2000/XP/NT 4.0/Server 2003,
right-click the icon of the installed printer, and then click “Properties”.
C250P
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Setup tab settings
3
Printing to suit the paper size
You can enlarge or reduce documents created when printing to match the
output paper size.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Original Size” and “Output Size” drop-down lists, select the
desired settings.
–
You can also specify any enlargement or reduction ration in the
“Zoom” box.
C250P
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
If the paper size is other than the custom size, select the desired settings
after specifying the settings in Custom Size.
When “W” is selected for each standard paper size in the printer driver,
the data can be centered and printed.
For example, if 8 1/2 × 11 size data is created and you want to center and
print on 11 × 17 size paper, specify “8 1/2 × 11 W” as the paper size in
the printer driver and specify “Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray” as the paper
source.
To print, load 11 × 17 paper in the tray (“Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray”) that is
specified in the printer driver, and then select “Paper Tray” in the control
panel and follow the steps described below to specify the paper size for
the paper tray that is used.
Select [8 1/2 × 11 W].
Enter the 11 × 17 paper size in [Oversize Paper].
C250P
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Saving a custom sizes
A custom size can be specified and saved in advance as described below.
1
From the “Original Size” and “Output Size” drop-down lists, select
“Custom Size Settings”.
The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears.
2
Specify settings for the following:
–
Size: Specify the width and length of the custom size according to
the selected measurement units.
3
Click the [OK] button.
Note
If using long paper, specify the size of the long paper in Custom Size. For
details, refer to “Printing on Banner Paper” on page 9-35.
C250P
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Selecting the output method
Not only can you print directly, but you can select “Secured Print”, which re-
quires a password to print, or “Save in User Box”, which saves documents
in the HDD.
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Output Method” drop-down list, select the output method.
–
–
Print: Select this setting to print immediately.
Secure Print: Select this setting to save the document to be printed
in the secured box of this machine. In order to print, you will be re-
quired to enter the user ID and password from this machine’s con-
trol panel. Select this setting when printing highly confidential
documents. (Up to 100 documents)
–
–
–
Save in User Box: Select this setting to save the document to be
printed in a box on this machine.
Save in User Box and Print: Select this setting to save the docu-
ment in a box and print it at the same time.
Proof and Print: Select this setting to temporarily stop printing after
part of the document has been printed. Select this setting to avoid
misprinting large print jobs.
Note
If the password rules have been enabled on the machine, specify a pass-
word that contains 8 digits.
Secured printing
If “Secure Print” was selected, enter the secure print ID and password in the
dialog box that appeared.
C250P
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
To print the document, select “Secure Print” in the Job Operation menu
of the machine’s control panel, and then enter the ID and password. For
details, refer to “Managing print jobs” on page 9-25.
Save in User Box
When “Save in User Box” or “Save in User Box and Print” is selected, specify
the file name and user box number in the dialog box that appears for entering
the file name and user box number.
Note
To print the document, enter the box number and password in the Job
Operation menu of the machine’s control panel. For details, refer to
“Managing print jobs” on page 9-25.
When a print job is sent, this machine stops printing temporarily after part of
the document has been printed. The remaining print job is stored in this ma-
chine as a print job. When printing multiple copies, you can print the remain-
ing part of the print job after checking the print results.
Note
To print the document, select it in the Job Operation menu of the ma-
chine’s control panel. For details, refer to “Managing print jobs” on
page 9-25.
C250P
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying Account Track settings
3
If account track settings have been specified on this machine, you must en-
ter an department name and password in order to print a job.
1
2
3
Click the Setup tab.
Click the User Authentication/Account Track button.
Select the “Account Track” check box, and then enter the department
name and password.
Note
Printing is not possible if a print job is sent using an account name or
password that is not registered with the account track settings of the ma-
chine or if a job is sent without the “Account Track” check box selected.
Even a registered account cannot print if it is not given printing permis-
sions.
For details on account management, contact the administrator of this
machine.
C250P
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Printing multiple pages on one page (N in 1)
3
You can print multiple document pages on one page. You can also specify
the “Booklet” setting to fold the printouts in two to make a booklet.
1
2
Click the Layout tab.
From the “Combination” drop-down list, select the number of pages to
be printed on one page.
To change the border line and printing order settings, click the [Com-
bination Details] button, and then change the settings in the dialog box
that appears.
Note
When printing a job that contains pages of different sizes and orienta-
tions, images may be missing or overlapping when the document is print-
ed.
Double-sided printing
You can print a document onto both sides of a page. This comes in handy
when you want to bind multiple-page documents.
1
2
Click the Layout tab.
From the “Double Sides” drop-down list, select “Double-Sided”.
Note
The double-sided printing function is available only when the optional
auto duplex unit is installed.
C250P
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Setting the file margin
File margins are added to the document before it is printed.
1
Click the Layout tab.
2
From the “Binding Position” drop-down list, select the position of the
binding margin.
Stapling
Multiple-page documents can be stapled.
1
2
Click the Layout tab.
From the “Staple” drop-down list, specify the number of staples and
the stapling position.
Note
The staple function is available only when optional Finisher is installed.
Note
Depending on the selected Binding Position setting, different stapling po-
sitions are available.
The number of staples that can be selected varies depending on the fin-
isher that is installed.
When optional finisher FS-501 is installed, “1 staple” can be set. When
optional finisher FS-514 or FS-603 is installed, “1 staple” or “2 staples”
can be set.
C250P
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Center Binding
You can specify to center staple and fold a printed document.
1
Click the Layout tab.
2
From the “Center Staple and Fold” drop-down list, select “Center Sta-
ple and Fold”.
3
To avoid printing on the folded part of the document, select the “Center
Erase” check box.
Note
“Center Staple and Fold” cannot be specified if “Staple” or “Punch” has
been selected.
“Center Staple and Fold” is available if optional finisher FS-603 or if sad-
dle stitcher SD-503 is installed on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
“Center Erase” is available only if finisher FS-603 is installed.
The available center binding and folding settings differ depending on the
finisher that is installed. When FS-514 is installed, in addition to “Fold &
Staple” (which folds the documents in half before stapling them), “Center
Staple” (which binds documents with staples at the center) and “Fold”
(which folds documents in half) are available. When FS-603 is installed,
only “Center Staple and Fold” is available.
Hole punching
Holes can be punched into the printed document.
1
2
Click the Layout tab.
From the drop-down list, select whether two or three holes are to be
punched.
Note
The hole punch function is available only when optional finisher FS-603
and punch kit PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and
punch kit PK-510 are installed.
C250P
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
Depending on the selected Binding Position setting, different hole-
punching positions are available.
Specifying the Per Page Setting tab settings
Printing documents with a front cover/back cover
1
2
Click the Per Page Setting tab.
From the “Front Cover Page” and “Back Cover Page” drop-down lists,
select the desired printing settings.
–
To print on the front cover and back cover, select “Printed”. To only
add a blank page, select “Blank”.
3
Select the paper tray that contains the loaded paper for the front cover
and back cover.
C250P
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Watermark tab settings
3
Printing a watermark
You can print specific text in the background as a watermark.
1
2
3
Click the Watermark tab.
From the drop-down list, select the watermark that you want to print.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Transparent: The watermark is transparent.
1st Page Only: Prints the watermark only on the first page.
Repeat: Prints several watermarks on one page.
Note
If “Booklet” was selected in the “Combination” drop-down list, the water-
mark is not printed.
C250P
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Editing a watermark
You can change the fonts and position of the watermark, and you can regis-
ter a new watermark.
1
2
Click the Watermark tab.
To create a watermark, click the [Add] button.
–
To change a watermark, select the watermark to be changed, and
then click the [Edit] button.
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Watermark Name: Specify the watermark name being registered.
Watermark text: Enter the watermark text.
Font Name, Size, Style, Angle, Color, and Frame: Specify the font,
character size, style, text angle, color, and frame of the watermark.
Position: Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to specify the
watermark position.
–
–
Sharing: Select whether to register the watermark as public or pri-
vate.
Note
Only the administrator can select a setting under “Sharing”.
C250P
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Quality tab settings
3
Specifying settings
1
2
Click the Quality tab.
Specify settings for the following:
Original Image Type
Select the contents of the original document to print with a quality
suitable for the original document.
Document: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for doc-
uments containing mostly text.
Photo: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for photos.
DTP: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for documents
produced using a DTP application.
WEB: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for Web page
printing.
CAD: Select this setting to print with a quality suitable for CAD data
printing.
Select Color
Select the color for printing.
Color: Select this setting to print in color.
Grayscale: Select this setting to print in grayscale.
Quality Adjustment
Adjust the image quality.
Detailed: Select this setting to separately adjust the text, photos, and
charts in the document.
C250P
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Font settings
You can replace the TrueType fonts used in Windows with the printer fonts
of this machine.
1
2
Click the [Font Settings] button.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
Download Font Format: Select the TrueType font type to download
when downloading the TrueType fonts and not using the printer
fonts.
User Printer Fonts: Select to enable the substitution setting of the
printer fonts. If enabled, the TrueType fonts to be substituted are
not downloaded to the printer.
Note
Using the printer fonts will shorten the printing time, however, there may
be a difference in the screen display and the print results.
When using TrueType fonts, select from the “Download Font Format”
drop-down list the font type to be downloaded to the printer.
Specify the font replacement list from the Device Settings tab.
C250P
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Option tab settings
3
Select the name of the model and specify whether or not options are installed
so that the options installed on the machine can be used from the printer
driver.
Note
If the installed options are not set from the Option tab, the function for the
option cannot be used with the printer driver. When installing options, be
sure to specify the correct settings.
C250P
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Specifying settings
1
For Windows 2000/NT 4.0, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”,
and then click “Printers”.
For Windows XP/Server 2003, click the [Start] button, and then click
“Printers and Faxes”.
–
If “Printers and Faxes” does not appear in the Start menu, open the
Control Panel from the Start menu, select “Printers and Other Hard-
ware”, and then select “Printers and Faxes”.
2
3
4
Right-click the printer icon, and then click “Properties”.
Click the Option tab.
Select “Model” from the list, and then select the name of the model be-
ing used from the drop-down list below.
5
Select an installed option, and then select a setting from the drop-
down list below.
C250P
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
To automatically register the installed options in the “Option” list, click
the [Gather Option Information] button when connected to the machine.
The [Gather Option Information] button can only be used when the SNMP
setting is enabled on this machine and the SNMP v1/v2c (IP) setting
check box is selected.
When the Mail Bin Kit is installed, you can assign output tray 1 and output
tray 2 as mail bins.
To assign the output destination of the mail bins, select “Bin Setting”
from “User Setting” — “Output Setting” on the control panel.
If “Printer” is displayed when specifying the output destination in the
printer driver, the mail bin that is selected is shown in the figure.
C250P
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Saving the driver settings
With PostScript drivers, you can save the new settings of the driver and recall
them as necessary.
To save the driver settings
1
2
Change the driver settings in the Setup tab and the Layout tab.
Click the [Save] button.
C250P
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3
Enter the file name in the “Name” text box.
4
5
Enter a message in the “Comment” text box as necessary.
Specify whether to share the driver settings being saved with other us-
ers.
6
Click the [OK] button.
The settings are registered in a library.
Note
The file extension is “.ksf”.
You can save up to 25 sets of settings in the library.
Only the administrator can select a setting under “Sharing”.
Viewing the settings
Select the settings to restore from the “Easy Set” drop-down list on the Print-
ing Preferences dialog box.
The setting values are recalled, and the Printing Preferences dialog box ap-
pears again.
C250P
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Changing the settings
1
2
On the Printing Preferences dialog box, click the [Edit] button.
From the list, select the file that you want to change, and then change
the settings. To delete the file, click the [Delete] button.
3
Click the [Options] button, check the settings to recall, and then click
the [OK] button.
4
Click the [OK] button.
C250P
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3.4
Setting up the PPD driver (Windows)
Settings
Paper tab
Item
Function
Paper size
Layout
Specifies the paper size.
Specifies the number of pages printed on one page.
Specifies the orientation.
Orientation
Rotated
Rotates the paper.
Paper source
Copies
Selects the paper tray.
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Specifies the paper type and output device.
More Options
C250P
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Graphics tab
3
Item
Function
Resolution
Color Control
Halftoning
Special
Specifies the print resolution.
Specifies whether to adjust the color to that on the screen.
Specifies the halftone number of lines and the pattern angle.
Prints a negative or mirror image.
Scaling
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Device Options tab
To specify the following printer-specific options, right-click the printer icon in
the Printers window, and then click “Properties” in the menu that appeared.
Item
Function
Collated
Specifies whether to print multiple copies in sets.
When printing multiple copies, shifts the output position of each set.
Specifies the binding position.
Specifies double-sided printing.
Specifies booklet printing.
Offset
Binding Position
Duplex
Combination
Staple
Performs stapling.
Punch
Performs hole punching.
Fold
Performs folding.
Center Erase
Front Cover Page
Does not print on the folded part of the center binding.
Attaches a front cover page.
Paper Tray
Selects the paper tray for the front cover.
(Front Cover Page)
Back Cover Page
Attaches a back cover page.
Paper Tray
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
(Back Cover Page)
Transparency Interleave Inserts interleaves between overhead projector transparencies.
Paper Tray (Transparen- Selects the paper tray for the transparency interleaves.
cy Interleave)
Wait Mode
Temporarily stops printing after part of the document has been print-
ed so that the proof print can be checked.
Select Color
Specifies whether to print in color or grayscale.
Original Image Type
Color Matching (Text)
Pure Black (Text)
Screen (Text)
Prints with a quality suitable for the original document.
Adjusts the color quality of the text in a document.
Specifies whether to print the text in a document in grayscale.
Specifies screening of the text in a document.
C250P
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Item
Function
Color Matching (Photo)
Pure Black (Photo)
Screen (Photo)
Adjusts the color quality of photos in a document.
Specifies whether to print the photos in a document in grayscale.
Specifies screening of photos in a document.
Smoothing (Photo)
Color Setting (Graphic)
Specifies smoothing of photos in a document.
Adjusts the color quality of charts and graphs in a document to the
text or photo settings.
Smoothing (Graphic)
Adjusts the smoothing process of charts and graphs in a document
to the text or photo settings.
You can specify the following options by right-clicking the printer icon in the
Printers window, then clicking “Properties”.
Device option tab
Item
Function
Available printer memory Specifies the memory installed on this machine.
Installable options
Specifies the options installed on this machine.
PostScript tab
Item
Function
PostScript output format Specifies the PostScript file output method.
PostScript header
Specifies whether to transmit header information to the printer.
Print PostScript error in- Specifies whether to print PostScript error reports.
formation
PostScript timeout val-
ues
Specifies the time for a timeout.
Fonts tabs
Item
Function
Send TrueType fonts to
printer according to the
fonts Substitution Table
Prints the font specified in the Font Substitution Table with printer
fonts.
The Font Substitution Table can be edited by clicking the [Edit the
Table] button.
Always use built-in print- Prints all fonts with printer fonts.
er fonts instead of Tru-
eType fonts
Always use TrueType
fonts
The printer fonts are not substituted.
Specifies the font transmission method.
Send Fonts As
C250P
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Paper tab settings
3
You can specify the orientation and number of pages to be printed on one
page when printing.
Specifying settings
1
Click the Paper tab.
2
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
Paper size: Select the paper size.
Layout: Select the number of pages to be printed on one page (N in
1 printing).
–
–
–
–
–
Orientation: Select the orientation.
Rotated: Select this check box to rotate the paper.
Paper source: Select the paper tray.
Copies: Specify the number of copies to print.
More Options: Specify the paper type and output device.
C250P
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specifying the Device Options tab settings
3
From the Device Options tab, you can specify advanced functions, such as
finishing functions and color adjustments.
Specifying settings
1
2
Click the Device Options tab.
Select a function, and then select the setting from the “Change setting
for” drop-down list.
C250P
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
For the functions and settings that can be specified, refer to “Settings”
on page 3-68.
“Center Staple and Fold” cannot be specified if “Staple” or “Punch” has
been selected.
The available center binding and folding settings differ depending on the
finisher that is installed. When FS-514 is installed, in addition to “Fold &
Staple” (which folds the documents in half before stapling them), “Center
Staple” (which binds documents with staples at the center) and “Fold”
(which folds documents in half) are available. When FS-603 is installed,
only “Center Staple and Fold” is available.
The number of staples that can be selected varies depending on the fin-
isher that is installed.
When optional finisher FS-501 is installed, “1 staple” can be set. When
optional finisher FS-603 or FS-514 is installed, “1 staple” or “2 staples”
can be set.
Note
The double-sided printing function is available only when the optional
auto duplex unit is installed.
“Staple” is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
“Punch” is available only when optional finisher FS-603 and punch kit
PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and punch kit PK-
510 are installed.
“Center Staple and Fold” is available if optional finisher FS-603 or if sad-
dle stitcher SD-503 is installed on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
“Center Erase” is available only if finisher FS-603 is installed.
C250P
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Specifying the options
You can specify the options installed on this machine so that they can be
used from the printer driver.
Note
If the installed options are not set from the Device Options tab, the func-
tion for the option cannot be used with the printer driver. When installing
options, be sure to specify the correct settings.
To select an option
1
For Windows 98SE/Me, click the [Start] button, point to “Settings”, and
then click “Printers”.
2
3
4
Right-click the printer icon, and then click “Properties”.
Click the Device Options tab.
Select a function, and then select the setting from the “Change setting
for” drop-down list.
C250P
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
For the functions and settings that can be specified, refer to “Settings”
on page 3-68.
C250P
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3.5
Setting up the PPD driver (Mac OS 9.2)
Settings
The functions of this machine can be specified on the Paper Setup and Print
dialog boxes displayed from an application.
The settings can only be applied while using the application. When the ap-
plication is exited, the settings return to their defaults.
Page Setup dialog box
C250P
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Page Setup items
3
Menu
Item
Function
Page Attributes
Paper
Specifies the paper size.
Orientation
Scale
Specifies the orientation.
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Prints the image flipped horizontally.
Prints the image flipped vertically.
Prints a negative image.
PostScript Options Flip Horizontal
Flip Vertical
Invert Image
Substitute Fonts
Smooth Text
Replaces some fonts with printer fonts.
Smooths text data.
Smooth Graphics
Smooths graphic data.
Precision Bitmap
Alignment
Corrects jagged graphic images.
Unlimited Download- Does not limit downloading screen fonts.
able Fonts
Custom Page Sizes Units
Selects the measurement unit.
Specifies any paper size.
Paper Size
Margins
Specifies the paper margins.
Custom Page Size
Name
Enters the registered name for the specified paper
size and margin after the [OK] button is clicked.
Note
Depending on the application, “Page Setup” may be displayed as “Paper
Setup”. In addition, you may have to select “Paper Setup”, then “Op-
tions” from the “File” menu.
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
C250P
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Print dialog box
Print items
Menu
Item
Function
General
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Prints multiple copies in sets.
Specifies the page range to print.
Selects the paper tray.
Collated
Pages
Paper Source
Print Color
Intent
Color Matching
Specifies the color for printing.
Selects the matching method.
Printer Profile
Specifies the color adjustment profile of the out-
put device.
Background Print-
ing
Print in
Specifies background printing.
Print Time
Format
Specifies the priority level and print time.
Save as File
Specifies the output format of the PostScript
file.
PostScript Level
Data Format
Specifies the PostScript level.
Specifies the format to save a document.
Font Inclusion
Specifies whether to include the font data on a
file.
Font Settings
Font Documentation
Font Downloading
Adds information to the font key.
Specifies the conditions to download fonts.
C250P
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Menu
Item
Function
Layout
Pages per sheet
Specifies the number of pages to print on one
page.
Layout direction
Border
Specifies the page order for printing multiple
pages on one page.
Specifies the borders around pages.
Job Logging
If there is a PostScript Specifies the PostScript error report conditions.
error
Job Documentation
Specifies the conditions for the operation record
to be saved.
Job Documentation
Folder
Specifies the folder to which the operation
record is to be saved.
Cover Page
Print Cover Page
Attaches a cover.
Cover Page Paper
Source
Selects the paper tray containing the cover pag-
es.
Finishing Options 1 Offset
Output Tray
Specifies offset.
Selects the exit tray.
Binding Position
Duplex
Selects the binding position.
Performs double-sided printing.
Specifies booklet printing.
Performs stapling.
Combination
Staple
Punch
Performs hole punching.
Performs folding.
Finishing Options 2 Fold
Center Erase
Does not print on the folded part of the center
binding.
Front Cover Page
Attaches a front cover page.
Paper Tray (Front
Cover Page)
Selects the paper tray for the front cover.
Back Cover Page
Attaches a back cover page.
Paper Tray (Back
Cover Page)
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
Transparency Inter-
leave
Inserts interleaves between overhead projector
transparencies.
C250P
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Menu
Item
Function
Finishing Options 3 Paper Tray (Transpar- Selects the paper tray for the transparency inter-
ency Interleave)
Wait Mode
leaves.
Temporarily stops printing after part of the doc-
ument has been printed so that the proof print
can be checked.
Resolution
Specifies the print resolution.
Select Color
Specifies whether to print in color or grayscale.
Original Image Type
Prints with a quality suitable for the original doc-
ument.
Color Matching (Text) Adjusts the color quality of the text in a docu-
ment.
Pure Black (Text)
Specifies whether to print the text in a document
in grayscale.
Finishing Options 4 Screen (Text)
Specifies whether screening of the text in a doc-
ument.
Color Matching (Pho- Adjusts the color quality of photos in a docu-
to)
ment.
Pure Black (Photo)
Specifies whether to print the photos in a docu-
ment in grayscale.
Screen (Photo)
Specifies screening of photos in a document.
Specifies smoothing of photos in a document.
Smoothing (Photo)
Color Setting (Graph- Adjusts the color quality of charts and graphs in
ic)
a document to the text or photo settings.
Smoothing (Graphic)
Adjusts the smoothing process of charts and
graphs in a document to the text or photo set-
tings.
Note
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
C250P
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Page setup
Basic settings (Page Attributes)
1
2
Select “Paper Setup” or “Page Setup” from the “File” menu.
Select “Page Attributes”.
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Paper: Select the paper size.
Orientation: Select the orientation.
Scale: Specify the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Note
The folding function can be selected from the screen that is displayed
when “Layout” is selected in the Print dialog box.
C250P
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Custom Page Sizes
1
2
3
4
Select “Paper Setup” or “Page Setup” from the “File” menu.
Select “Custom Page Sizes”.
Click the [New] button.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Paper Size: Specify the paper size.
Margins: Specify the paper margins.
Custom Page Size Name: Enter the registered name for the speci-
fied paper size and margin, and then click the [OK] button.
Units: Select the measurement units.
–
5
Click the [OK] button.
This registers the custom page settings, and allows you to select the
paper in the screen that appears when “Page Attributes” is selected.
C250P
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
PostScript Options
1
2
3
Select “Paper Setup” or “Page Setup” from the “File” menu.
Select “PostScript Options”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
Visual Effects: Select the “Flip Horizontal”, “Flip Vertical”, or “Invert
Image” check box.
–
Substitute Fonts: Select this check box to replace some fonts with
printer fonts.
–
–
–
Smooth Text: Select this check box to smooth text data.
Smooth Graphics: Select this check box to smooth graphic data.
Precision Bitmap Alignment: Select this check box to correct jag-
ged graphic images.
–
Unlimited Downloadable Fonts: Does not limit downloading screen
fonts.
C250P
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Printing
Basic settings (General)
1
2
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “General”.
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
Copies: Specify the number of copies to print.
Collated: Select this check box to print multiple copies in sets.
Pages: Specify the page range to print.
Paper Source: Select the paper tray.
C250P
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Printing multiple pages on one page (Layout)
3
You can specify if multiple pages are printed on one page of paper or if dou-
ble-sided printing is performed.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Layout”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Pages per sheet: Select the number of pages to print on one page.
Layout direction: Select the document page order.
Border: Select the type of borders to be printed around pages.
C250P
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Printer-specific options (Finishing Options 1 to 4)
3
You can specify printer-specific options. You can specify this option when
using the staple or hole punch functions of this machine.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Finishing Options 1 to 4”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Offset: Select if offset printing is performed.
Output Tray: Select the exit tray.
Binding Position: Select the binding position.
Duplex: Select if double-sided printing is performed.
Combination: Select if booklet printing is performed.
Staple: Select if stapling is performed.
Punch: Select if hole punching is performed.
Fold: Select if folding is performed.
Center Erase: Does not print on the folded part of the center bind-
ing.
–
–
Front Cover Page: Select if a front cover page is to be attached.
Paper Tray (Front Cover Page): Select the paper tray for the front
cover.
–
–
Back Cover Page: Select if a back cover page is to be attached.
Paper Tray (Back Cover Page): Select the paper tray for the back
cover.
–
–
–
Transparency Interleave: Select if interleaves are to be inserted be-
tween overhead projector transparencies.
Paper Tray (Transparency Interleave): Select the paper tray for the
transparency interleaves.
Wait Mode: Select if printing is temporarily stopped after part of the
document has been printed so that the proof print can be checked.
Resolution: Select the resolution.
Select Color: Select whether to print in color or grayscale.
Original Image Type: Select the quality suitable for the original doc-
ument.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Color Matching (Text): Adjust the color quality of the text in a doc-
ument.
Pure Black (Text): Select whether to print the text in a document in
grayscale.
Screen (Text): Select if screening of the text in a document is per-
formed.
Color Matching (Photo): Adjust the color quality of photos in a doc-
ument.
Pure Black (Photo): Select whether to print the photos in a docu-
ment in grayscale.
C250P
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
–
–
–
–
Screen (Photo): Select if screening of photos in a document is per-
formed.
Smoothing (Photo): Select if smoothing of photos in a document is
performed.
Color Setting (Graphic): Adjust the color quality of charts and
graphs in a document to the text or photo settings.
Smoothing (Graphic): Adjust the smoothing process of charts and
graphs in a document to the text or photo settings.
Note
The double-sided printing function is available only when the optional
auto duplex unit is installed.
“Staple” is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
“Punch” is available only when optional finisher FS-603 and punch kit
PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and punch kit PK-
510 are installed.
“Center Staple and Fold” is available if optional finisher FS-603 or if sad-
dle stitcher SD-503 is installed on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
“Center Erase” is available only if finisher FS-603 is installed.
C250P
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
“Center Staple and Fold” cannot be specified if “Staple” or “Punch” has
been selected.
The available center binding and folding settings differ depending on the
finisher that is installed. When FS-514 is installed, in addition to “Fold &
Staple” (which folds the documents in half before stapling them), “Center
Staple” (which binds documents with staples at the center) and “Fold”
(which folds documents in half) are available. When FS-603 is installed,
only “Center Staple and Fold” is available.
The number of staples that can be selected varies depending on the fin-
isher that is installed.
When optional finisher FS-501 is installed, “1 staple” can be set. When
optional finisher FS-603 or FS-514 is installed, “1 staple” or “2 staples”
can be set.
Setting options
You can specify the options installed on this machine so that they can be
used from the printer driver.
Reminder
If the installed options are not set from the Installable Options screen, the
function for the option cannot be used with the printer driver. When in-
stalling options, be sure to specify the correct settings.
C250P
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Specifying settings
1
2
3
4
On the Apple menu, click “Chooser”.
Select the printer name.
Click the [Setup] button.
Click the [Configure] button.
The setting screen for adding options appears.
5
6
Select the options that are installed on this machine from Options In-
stalled 1 and Options Installed 2.
Click the [OK] button.
The Chooser window appears again.
7
Close the Chooser window.
Note
The option settings are displayed automatically the first time the printer
driver is selected. For details, refer to “Selecting a printer” on page 2-24.
C250P
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
3.6
Setting up the PPD driver (Mac OS X)
Settings
The functions of this machine can be specified on the Paper Setup and Print
dialog boxes displayed from the application.
The settings can only be applied while using the application. When the ap-
plication is exited, the settings return to their defaults.
Page Setup dialog box
Page Setup items
Menu
Item
Function
Page Attributes
Paper Size
Orientation
Scale
Specifies the paper size.
Specifies the orientation.
Specifies the enlargement and reduction ratio.
Specifies any paper size.
Custom Paper Size Paper Size
(Page size)
Printer Margins
Specifies the paper margins.
C250P
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
Depending on the application, “Page Setup” may be displayed as “Paper
Setup”. In addition, you may have to select “Paper Setup”, then “Op-
tions” from the “File” menu.
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
To specify the “Custom Paper Size” settings for Mac OS 10.4, select
“Manage Custom Sizes” from the “Paper Size” drop-down list.
C250P
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Print dialog box
Print items
Menu
Item
Function
Copies & Pages
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Prints multiple copies in sets.
Specifies the page range to print.
Collated
Pages
Layout
Pages per Sheet
Specifies the number of pages to print on one
page.
Layout Direction
Border
Specifies the document page order.
Specifies the borders around pages.
Specify the output format of a file.
Specifies the format of the file being output.
Specifies the print time.
*2
Output Options
Save as File
Format
*1
Scheduler
Print Document
Priority
Specifies the priority level.
*1
Paper Handling
Reverse Page
Prints pages in the reverse order.
Order (Page order)
Print
Selects the pages for printing.
Specifies the output paper size.
Destination Paper
*3
Size
*1
ColorSync
Color Conversion
Quartz Filter
Specifies the color conversion method.
Specifies the color for printing.
*1
Cover Page
Print Cover Page
Cover Page Type
Specifies whether to attach a cover page.
Selects whether “Confidential” or any other com-
ment is printed on the cover page.
Billing Info
Enter the user information used for the account
calculation.
C250P
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Menu
Item
Function
Error Handling
PostScript Errors
Specifies whether to print an error report when a
PostScript error occurs.
Tray Switching
Switches the paper source tray (this function can-
not be selected on this machine).
Paper Feed
Finishing
All pages from
First page from
Remaining from
Collate
Selects the paper tray.
Selects the paper tray.
Selects the paper tray.
Prints multiple copies in sets.
Specifies offset.
Offset
Duplex
Performs double-sided printing.
Selects the exit tray.
Output Tray
Binding Position
Combination
Staple
Specifies the binding position.
Specifies booklet printing.
Performs stapling.
Hole-Punch
Fold
Performs hole punching.
Performs folding.
Center Erase
Does not print on the folded part of the center
binding.
Quality
Resolution
Specifies the resolution (this function cannot be
selected on this machine).
Select Color
Selects the color for printing.
Original Image Type Prints with a quality suitable for the original docu-
ment.
Color Matching
(Text)
Adjusts the color quality of the text in a document.
Pure Black (Text)
Specifies whether to print the text in a document in
grayscale.
Screen (Text)
Specifies screening of the text in a document.
Adjusts the color quality of photos in a document.
Color Matching
(Photo)
Pure Black (Photo)
Specifies whether to print the photos in a docu-
ment in grayscale.
Screen (Photo)
Specifies screening of photos in a document.
Specifies smoothing of photos in a document.
Smoothing (Photo)
Color Setting
(Graphic)
Adjusts the color quality of a charts and graphs in
a document to the text or photo settings.
Smoothing (Graph- Adjusts the smoothing process of a charts and
ic)
graphs in a document to the text or photo settings.
C250P
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Menu
Item
Function
Setup
Paper Type
Front Cover Page
Selects the paper type.
Attaches a front cover page.
Selects the paper tray for the front cover.
Paper Tray (Front
Cover Page)
Back Cover Page
Attaches a back cover page.
Paper Tray (Back
Cover Page)
Selects the paper tray for the back cover.
Transparency Inter- Inserts interleaves between overhead projector
leave
transparencies.
Paper Tray (Trans-
parency Interleave)
Selects the paper tray for the transparency inter-
leaves.
Security
Output Method
Specifies output methods, such as “Secure Print”
and “Save in User Box”.
Secure Print Set-
tings
Specifies secure print ID and password for “Se-
cure Print”.
Save in User Box
Settings
Specifies the file name and user box number for
“Save in User Box”.
Account Track
Checks if account track settings have been ap-
plied and specifies the department name and
password.
Note
The dialog boxes differ depending on the application.
The items indicated by “*1” are displayed in Mac OS 10.3 and Mac OS
10.4.
The items indicated by “*2” are displayed only in Mac OS 10.3.
The items indicated by “*3” are displayed only in Mac OS 10.4.
C250P
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Page setup
Basic settings (Page Attributes)
1
2
Select “Page Setup” or “Paper Setup” from the “File” menu.
Select “Page Attributes”.
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Paper Size: Select the paper size.
Orientation: Select the orientation.
Scale: Specify the enlargement and reduction ratio.
C250P
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
If the paper size is other than the custom size, select the desired settings
after specifying the settings in Custom Size.
When “W” is selected for each standard paper size in the printer driver,
the data can be centered and printed.
For example, if 8 1/2 × 11 size data is created and you want to center and
print on 11 × 17 size paper, specify “8 1/2 × 11 W” as the paper size in
the printer driver and specify “Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray” as the paper
source.
To print, load 11 × 17 paper in the tray (“Tray 1” or “Bypass Tray”) that is
specified in the printer driver, and then select “Paper Tray” in the control
panel and follow the steps described below to specify the paper size for
the paper tray that is used.
Select [8 1/2 × 11 W].
Enter the 11 × 17 paper size in [Oversize Paper].
C250P
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Custom Paper Size
1
2
Select “Page Setup” or “Paper Setup” from the “File” menu.
For Mac OS 10.3, select “Custom Paper Size” from “Settings”.
For Mac OS 10.4, select “Manage Custom Sizes” from the “Paper Size”
dropdown list.
3
4
5
Click the [New] (Mac OS 10.3) or [+] (Mac OS 10.4) button.
Enter the paper size name.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
Paper Size: Specify the paper size.
Printer Margins: Specify the paper margins.
6
7
For Mac OS 10.3, click the [Save] button.
For Mac OS 10.4, proceed to step 7.
Click the [OK] button.
This registers the custom paper size which allows you to select the pa-
per size in the screen that appears when “Page Attributes” is selected.
C250P
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Printing
Basic settings (Copies & Pages)
1
2
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Copies & Pages”.
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Copies: Specify the number of copies to print.
Collated: Select this check box to print multiple copies in sets.
Pages: Specify the page range to print.
C250P
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Printing multiple pages on one page (Layout)
You can print multiple pages on one sheet.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Layout”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Pages per Sheet: Select the number of pages to print on one page.
Layout Direction: Select the document page order.
Border: Select the type of borders to be printed around pages.
C250P
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Paper Feed
You can specify the paper tray for printing.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Paper Feed”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
All pages from: Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to print
all pages.
First page from: Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to print
the first page.
Remaining from: Select the paper tray loaded with the paper to
print the pages starting from the second page.
Security
Not only can you print directly, but you can select “Secure Print”, which re-
quires a password to print, “Save in User Box”, which saves documents in a
HDD, “Proof and Print”, which prints the first set of multiple copies and tem-
porarily stops printing, and “Account Track Settings”, which manages the
number of printed pages.
1
2
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Security”.
C250P
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
Specify settings for the following:
3
3
–
Output Method: Specify the conditions for “Secure Print” and
“Save in User Box”.
–
Secure Print Settings: Enter the ID and password when “Secure
Print” is selected from the “Output Method” drop-down list. Enter
the ID and password on this machine’s control panel when printing.
(Up to 100 documents)
–
–
Save in User Box Settings: Enter the file name and box number
when “Save in User Box” or “Save in User Box and Print” is select-
ed from the “Output Method” drop-down list.
Account Track: Register the department name and password when
account track settings have been applied on this machine and
when this check box is selected.
C250P
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
Printing is not possible if a print job is sent using an account name or
password that is not registered with the account track settings of the ma-
chine or if a job is sent without the “Account Track” check box selected.
Even a registered account cannot print if it is not given printing permis-
sions.
For details on account management, contact the administrator of this
machine.
If the password rules have been enabled on the machine, specify a pass-
word that contains 8 digits.
!
Detail
Print the document from the control panel of this machine. For details, re-
fer to “Managing print jobs” on page 9-25.
C250P
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Finishing
You can specify the various finishing functions of this machine, such as sta-
pling and hole punching.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Finishing”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Collate: Select this check box to print multiple copies in sets.
Offset: Select this check box to specify offset printing.
Duplex: Select this check box to specify double-sided printing.
Output Tray: Select the exit tray.
Binding Position: Select the binding position.
Combination: Select if booklet printing is performed.
Staple: Select if stapling is performed.
Hole-Punch: Select if hole punching is performed.
Fold: Select if folding is performed.
Center Erase: Does not print on the folded part of the center bind-
ing.
C250P
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Note
The double-sided printing function is available only when the optional
auto duplex unit is installed.
“Staple” is available only if the optional finisher is installed.
“Punch” is available only when optional finisher FS-603 and punch kit
PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and punch kit PK-
510 are installed.
“Center Staple and Fold” is available if optional finisher FS-603 or if sad-
dle stitcher SD-503 is installed on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
“Center Erase” is available only if finisher FS-603 is installed.
Note
“Fold and Staple” cannot be specified if “Staple” or “Punch” has been
selected.
The available center binding and folding settings differ depending on the
finisher that is installed. When FS-514 is installed, in addition to “Fold &
Staple” (which folds the documents in half before stapling them), “Center
Staple” (which binds documents with staples at the center) and “Fold”
(which folds documents in half) are available. When FS-603 is installed,
only “Center Staple and Fold” is available.
The number of staples that can be selected varies depending on the fin-
isher that is installed.
When optional finisher FS-501 is installed, “1 staple” can be set. When
optional finisher FS-603 or FS-514 is installed, “1 staple” or “2 staples”
can be set.
Quality
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Quality”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Resolution: Select the resolution.
Select Color: Select the color for printing.
Original Image Type: Select the quality suitable for the original doc-
ument.
C250P
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Color Matching (Text): Adjust the color quality of the text in a doc-
ument.
Pure Black (Text): Specify whether to print the text in a document
in grayscale.
Screen (Text): Select if screening of the text in a document is per-
formed
Color Matching (Photo): Adjust the color quality of photos in a doc-
ument.
Pure Black (Photo): Select whether to print the photos in a docu-
ment in grayscale.
Screen (Photo): Select if screening of photos in a document is per-
formed.
Smoothing (Photo): Select if smoothing of photos in a document is
performed.
Color Settings (Graphic): Adjust the color quality of charts and
graphs in a document to the text or photo settings.
Smoothing (Graphic): Adjust the smoothing process of charts and
graphs in a document to the text or photo settings.
C250P
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Setup
You can specify the cover settings.
1
2
3
From the “File” menu, select “Print”.
Select “Setup”.
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
Paper Type: Select the paper type.
Front Cover Page: Select if a front cover page is to be attached
Paper Tray (Front Cover Page): Select the paper tray for the front
cover.
–
–
Back Cover Page: Select if a back cover page is to be attached.
Paper Tray (Back Cover Page): Select the paper tray for the back
cover.
–
–
Transparency Interleave: Select if interleaves are to be inserted be-
tween overhead projector transparencies.
Paper Tray (Transparency Interleave): Select the paper tray for the
transparency interleaves.
C250P
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Setting options
You can specify the options installed on this machine so that they can be
used from the printer driver.
Reminder
If the installed options are not set from the Installable Options screen, the
function for the option cannot be used with the printer driver. When in-
stalling options, be sure to specify the correct settings.
Specifying settings
1
2
Open Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility), located on the hard disk in
Applications\Utilities, and then select the printer model.
From the “Printer” menu, select “Show Info”.
The “Printer Info” dialog box appears.
3
4
Select “Installable Options”.
Select the options that are installed on this machine.
5
Click the [Apply Changes] button or click [ ] to close the Printer info
dialog box.
C250P
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Saving the driver settings
With Mac OS X drivers, you can save the new settings of the driver and recall
them as necessary.
To save the driver settings
1
2
Change the driver settings in the dialog boxes that appear after “Cop-
ies & Pages” or “Layout” is selected.
From the “Presets” drop-down list, select “Save As”.
3
4
Enter the preset name in the “Save Preset As” box.
Click the “OK” button.
The settings are registered in the preset settings.
Viewing the settings
Select the preset name from the “Presets” drop-down list in the Print
%
dialog box to recall the settings.
C250P
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
Changing the settings
1
2
3
Select the preset name from the “Presets” drop-down list in the Print
dialog box to change the settings.
Change the driver settings in the dialog boxes that appear after “Cop-
ies & Pages” or “Layout” is selected.
From the “Presets” drop-down list, select “Save”.
–
To delete the preset settings, select “Delete”. To change the name,
select “Rename”.
The preset settings are changed.
C250P
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifying printer driver settings
3
C250P
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Control panel settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4
Control panel settings
4.1
Control panel
Available keys
From the control panel, jobs can be printed or deleted, initial settings, for ex-
ample, for paper, can be specified, or various settings such as network set-
tings can be changed.
The following four keys are used to specify settings.
Ready
Error
Menu
Select
Cancel
4
2
3
1
No.
Key
Use
1
[Menu/Select] key
While the machine is waiting to receive data, press this key
to display the settings menu.
If this key is pressed while a setting is displayed, that setting
is selected.
2
3
Arrow keys [↑] and [↓]
Arrow keys [←] and [→]
Press these keys to choose a different setting.
Press these keys to display a different menu screen.
When entering values, press these keys to select a different
digit to be changed.
4
[Cancel] key
Press this key to quit changing the settings in the menu.
C250P
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Basic operations
4
The procedures for changing settings are described below in the following
examples.
-
Basic menu operations → “Specifying the size of the paper in the bypass
tray”
-
-
User settings → “Specifying the “Sleep Mode” function”
Display the Administrator Setting screen → “Entering the administrator
password”
Basic menu operations
Example: “Paper Tray” — “Bypass Size”
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The settings menu ap-
pears.
Menu
Select
2
3
Press the [↓] key until “Paper Tray” appears.
Press the [→] key.
The “Paper Tray” menu appears.
C250P
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4
Press the [↓] key until “Bypass Size” appears.
5
6
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The paper size flashes, indicating that the setting can be changed.
Press the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired paper size appears.
7
8
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The paper size is changed and the next parameter appears.
If necessary, change other settings.
After the setting is changed, press the [Cancel] key.
The settings menu is exited.
Note
After changing the setting, press the [←] key until the settings menu is ex-
ited.
C250P
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Sleep mode
Example: “User Setting” — “Power Save” — “Sleep Mode”
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The settings menu ap-
pears.
Menu
Select
2
3
Press the [↓] key until “User Setting” appears.
Press the [→] key.
The “User Setting” menu appears.
C250P
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4
Press the [↓] key until “Power Save” appears.
5
6
Press the [→] key.
The “Power Save” menu appears.
Press the [↓] key until “Sleep Mode” appears.
7
8
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The setting flashes, indicating that it can be changed.
Press the [→] key.
The value flashes, indicating that it can be changed.
C250P
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
9
Press the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired value appears.
10 Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The “Sleep Mode” function is changed and the screen shown in step 4
appears.
If necessary, change other settings.
11 After the setting is changed, press the [Cancel] key.
The settings menu is exited.
Note
After changing the setting, press the [←] key until the settings menu is ex-
ited.
C250P
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Administrator password
Example: “Admin. Setting” — “Input password.”
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The settings menu ap-
pears.
Menu
Select
2
3
Press the [↓] key until “Admin. Setting” appears.
Press the [→] key.
A screen appears, requesting the administrator password.
C250P
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4
Press the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired value for the first digit of the
password appears.
5
Press the [→] key.
The next digit to the right can be entered.
6
7
Press the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired value for the second digit of
the password appears.
Continue pressing the [→] key so that the next digit can be entered and
pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired value appears.
8
After entering the password, press the [Menu/Select] key.
The “Admin. Setting” menu appears.
C250P
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4.2
Overview of utility mode parameters
Settings menu list
This section describes the parameters available when the [Menu/Select] key
is pressed.
Note
The parameters and settings that appear differ depending on the select-
ed settings and installed options.
Main menu
Note
The “Meter Count” menu can be displayed before the “Job Operation”
menu.
For details, contact your service representative.
C250P
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Job Operation menu
4
Note
The menus that appear may differ depending on the password that is
specified, if account track settings have been specified.
C250P
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
User Setting menu
4
C250P
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Admin. Setting menu
4
Note
If the entered administrator password is incorrect, the message “Pass-
word failure Please wait.” appears, and the “Admin. Setting” menu does
not appear.
If administrator authentication failed, causing the message “Password is
not valid” to appear and preventing any operation from being performed,
restart the machine.
C250P
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
After network settings are changed, the message “Completed. Turn pow-
er off.” appears. To apply the new settings, turn the machine off, then on
again.
When turning the machine off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the main power switch on after turning it off. The machine may not
operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
C250P
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Note
When “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, “Write Setting” cannot be
changed.
C250P
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Note
When “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, “SSL Setting” of “TCP Socket”
cannot be changed.
C250P
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
*1 Appears when the HDD is installed.
*2 Appears when the security kit is installed.
C250P
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Note
If the entered password is incorrect, the message “Password failure
Please wait.” appears, and the menu for the function does not appear.
If the entered encryption key is incorrect, the message “Encryption Pass-
phrase failure” appears, and the menu for the function does not appear.
If administrator authentication failed, causing the message “Password is
not valid” to appear and preventing any operation from being performed,
restart the machine.
When turning the machine off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the main power switch on after turning it off. The machine may not
operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
If “Enhanced Security” cannot be set to “ON”, the message “It cannot
change” appears. For details, contact the service representative.
When “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, “Prohibit Setting” of “Security
Details” cannot be changed.
C250P
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Note
When “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, “SSL” of “OpenAPI” and “Data
Capture” cannot be changed.
If an SSL certificate is not installed, “SSL” and “Port No. (SSL)” of
“OpenAPI” cannot be changed.
C250P
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Banner Print menu
4
C250P
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
4.3
Parameters
Job Operation
This section describes the parameters and main settings that can be speci-
fied after pressing the [Menu/Select] key, then selecting “Job Operation”.
Account Name
Parameters
Account Name
Password
Description
Initial Setting
Select the name of the account.
Type in the password for the account.
—
—
!
Detail
“Account Name” appears only if account track settings have been spec-
ified on this machine.
Secure Print
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
ID
Type in the ID for the confidential document.
—
—
Password
Type in the password for the confidential
document.
User Box
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Select User Box
User Box Password
Binding Position
Fold Position
Select the name of the box.
Type in the password of the box.
Adjust the center binding position.
Adjust the center folding position.
—
—
0
0
!
Detail
[Binding Position] and [Fold Position] appear only when the “Fold & Sta-
ple” setting is selected and optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
C250P
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Paper Tray
This section describes the parameters and main settings that can be speci-
fied after pressing the [Menu/Select] key, then selecting “Paper Tray”.
Parameters
Tray 1 Size
Tray 1 Type
Tray 2 Type
Tray 3 Type
Tray 4 Type
Bypass Size
Description
Initial Setting
8-1/2 × 11
Normal
Select the size of paper loaded in Tray 1.
Select the type of paper loaded in Tray 1.
Select the type of paper loaded in Tray 2.
Select the type of paper loaded in Tray 3.
Select the type of paper loaded in Tray 4.
Normal
Normal
Normal
Select the size of paper loaded in the bypass 8-1/2 × 11
tray.
Bypass Type
Select the type of paper loaded in the bypass Normal
tray.
!
Detail
If “Custom Size” or “Oversized Paper” is selected as the paper size, the
exact size can be specified.
- If postcards were loaded, select “Thick 2”.
- If “A6 Card T” is selected, “Thick 2” is automatically selected. If paper
other than postcards is loaded, change the paper type setting.
C250P
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
User Setting
This section describes the parameters and main settings that can be speci-
fied after pressing the [Menu/Select] key, then selecting “User Setting”.
Print Reports
Parameters
Meter Count
Check Consumable
Settings Info.
Font List
Description
Initial Setting
Prints the total checklist.
—
—
—
—
Prints the checklist for consumables.
Prints a list of the machine settings.
Prints the font lists for PCL mode or PS
mode.
Demo Page
Prints the demo page.
—
System Setting
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Language Setting
Specify the screen display language.
English
Power Save
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Low Power
Specify the desired length of time (between
10 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters
Power Save mode.
10 Min.
Sleep Mode
Select whether the machine automatically
enters Sleep mode (“ON” and “OFF”) and
specify the desired length of time (between
15 and 240 minutes) until the machine enters
Sleep mode.
ON
15 Min.
Depending on the Service Mode setting, the
“ON” and “OFF” settings may or may not be
available.
C250P
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Tray Setting
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Auto Tray Select
Specify the paper trays that are selected
when the paper tray is automatically
changed.
T1, T2, T3, T4, BP
Tray Priority
Specify the priority for selecting the paper
trays when the automatic paper-tray-switch-
ing operation is performed.
T1, T2, T3, T4, BP
Permit
Auto Tray Select
Select whether or not a paper tray loaded
with paper of the same size is selected auto-
matically when the paper tray becomes emp-
ty.
No Match. Paper
Select the operation that is performed when Stop Printing
there is no paper of the corresponding size in
the specified paper tray.
•
Stop Printing: The machine stops operat-
ing.
•
Switch Trays: The specified paper trays
are selected in the specified order of prior-
ity and, when the tray runs out of paper,
the next paper tray is selected.
Output Setting
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Print Output
Select whether the machine waits until the
first page of a print job is received before
starting to print or whether the machine waits
until all data is received before starting to
print.
Page Print
Exit Tray Set
Offset Setting
Specify the priority for using the output trays Main Tray
of the finisher.
Select whether or not printed papers are fed ON
out shifted when “Offset” is selected while a
finisher is installed.
•
•
[ON]: Pages are fed out shifted.
[OFF]: Pages are fed out without being
shifted.
Bin Setting
The output tray 1 can be specified as mailbin Disable
5 and the optional output tray can be speci-
fied as mailbin 6.
!
Detail
[Bin setting] appears if the optional mailbin kit is installed.
C250P
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Printer Setting
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Basic Set- PDL Setting
ting
Specify the printer description lan-
guage as “Auto”, “PCL”, or “PS”.
Auto
Auto
OFF
Paper Tray
Select the paper tray that is to be
used.
2-Sided Print
Select whether or not (“ON” or
“OFF”) pages are printed on both
sides.
Bind Direction
Select the binding position for dou- Left Bind
ble-sided printing (“Top Bind”, “Left
Bind”, or “Right Bind”).
Staple
Punch
Select whether or not (“ON” or
“OFF”) pages are to be stapled.
OFF
Select whether or not (“ON” or
“OFF”) holes are to be punched in
the pages.
OFF
# of Sets
Specify the number of copies to be
printed (between 1 and 999).
1
Paper Size
Org. Direction
Spool Setting
Select the size of paper that is to be 8-1/2 × 11
used.
Select the orientation of the print
image.
Portrait
Select whether or not a spool is
used.
ON
•
ON: If another job is received
while a job is being performed,
the next job is saved on the HDD.
OFF: The print data is not saved
on the HDD.
•
Size Change
Banner Setting
Banner Tray
Select whether or not (“ON” or
“OFF”) paper size substitutions A4
↔ Letter and A3 ↔ Ledger are per-
mitted.
ON
Select whether or not to print ban-
ner pages (front cover pages) con-
taining the name of the sender and
the subject of the print job.
ON
Select the paper tray used to print
banner pages.
Tray 1
C250P
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
PCL Set-
ting
Typeface
Specify the font to be used.
Refer to the following page for a list
of fonts that correspond to the num-
bers.
01
Symbol Set
Line/Page
Specify the symbol set to be used.
Desktop
60 lines
Specify the number of lines per
page.
Font Size 4.00
Specify the font size to be used.
Scalable Font;
4.00
CR/LF Mapping
Specify the substitution method for OFF
printing text data.
•
Mode 1: CR is substituted with
CR-LF.
•
Mode 2: LF is substituted with
CR-LF.
•
•
Mode 3: Substitute with CR-LF.
OFF: No substitution is per-
formed.
PS Setting PS Error Print
Select whether or not error informa- Enable
tion is printed when an error has oc-
curred during PS rasterization.
Font List
No.
0
Font Name
No.
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Font Name
Courier
Helvetica BoldOblique
Helvetica Narrow
1
CG Times
2
CG Times Bold
CG Times Italic
CG Times Bold Italic
CG Omega
Helvetica Narrow Bold
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
Palatino Roman
3
4
5
6
CG Omega Bold
CG Omega Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic
Coronet
Palatino Bold
7
Palatino Italic
8
Palatino Bold Italic
9
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
10
11
Clarendon Condensed
Univers Medium
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Ob-
lique
12
Univers Bold
52
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Ob-
lique
13
14
15
Univers Medium Italic
Univers Bold Italic
53
54
55
ITC Bookman Light
ITC Bookman Demi
ITC Bookman Light Italic
Univers Condensed Medium
C250P
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
No.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Font Name
No.
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
Font Name
Univers Condensed Bold
Univers Condensed Medium Italic
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
Antique Olive
ITC Bookman Demi Italic
New Century Schoolbook Roman
New Century Schoolbook Bold
New Century Schoolbook Italic
Antique Olive Bold
Antique Olive Italic
Garamond Antiqua
Garamond Halbfett
Garamond Kursiv
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
Marigold
New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Times Roman
Times Bold
Times Italic
Times Bold Italic
ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic
Symbol
Albertus Medium
Albertus Extra Bold
Arial
SymbolPS
Wingdings
ITC Zapf Dingbats
Courier Bold
Arial Bold
Arial Italic
Courier Italic
Arial Bold Italic
Courier Bold Italic
Letter Gothic
Times New Roman
Times New Roman Bold
Times New Roman Italic
Times New Roman Bold Italic
Helvetica
Letter Gothic Bold
Letter Gothic Italic
CourierPS
CourierPS Bold
CourierPS Oblique
CourierPS Bold Oblique
Line Printer ON
Helvetica Bold
Helvetica Oblique
C250P
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Admin. Setting
This section describes the parameters and main settings that can be speci-
fied after pressing the [Menu/Select] key, then selecting “Admin. Setting”.
Network Setting
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
TCP/IP
TCP/IP Setting
Select whether or not TCP/IP is
used.
ON
IP def. method
Select whether or not DHCP is used Auto
to automatically acquire the IP ad-
dress.
If “Auto” is selected, specify wheth-
er or not “DHCP”, “BOOTP”, “ARP/
PING”, or “AUTO IP” is used to ac-
quire the IP address.
If “Direct” is selected, specify set-
tings for “IP Address”, “Subnet
Mask”, and “Default Gateway”.
DNS Server
Specify the DNS server settings.
—
DNS Auto Obtain
Select whether or not the DNS serv- Enable
er is automatically acquired.
Priority DNS
Register the address of the DNS
server given priority.
—
—
—
Substitute DNS 1 & 2 Register the addresses of the alter-
nate DNS servers.
IP Filtering
Specify the settings for IP address
filtering.
RAW Port No.
Host Name
Specify the RAW port number.
Specify the host name.
—
—
—
DNS Domain Set
Specify the name of the DNS do-
main.
DNS Auto Obtain
Default Name
Select whether or not the name of
the DNS domain is automatically
acquired.
Enable
Register the default domain name.
—
—
—
—
Search Name 1, 2 & 3 Register the search domain name.
DNS Domain Set
DynamicDNS Set
Specify the domain name.
Select whether or not dynamic DNS
is enabled when the DNS server be-
ing used is compatible with dynamic
DNS functions.
C250P
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
NetWare
IPX Setting
Specify the name of the DNS do-
main.
—
IPX Setting
Ethernet Frame
Print Setting
Print Mode
Select whether or not IPX is used.
Select the frame type.
ON
—
Specify the server conditions.
—
Select whether or not the print
mode is used.
OFF
Pserver
Specify the various parameters
(password, Bindery/NDS, server
name, etc.) for the print server.
—
N/R Printer
Specify the printer name and printer
number.
—
AppleTalk
AppleTalk Set
Select whether or not AppleTalk is
used.
ON
Printer Name
Zone Name
Specify the name of the printer.
Specify the zone name.
—
—
Bonjour
SMB
Bonjour Setting
Select whether or not Bonjour is
used.
ON
Bonjour Name
WINS
Specify the Bonjour name.
—
Specify the WINS function for SMB.
—
WINS Setting
Select whether or not the WINS
function is used.
ON
DNS Auto Obtain
Select whether or not the IP address Enable
of the WINS server is automatically
acquired from the DHCP server.
WINS Server IP 1 & 2 Register the IP address of the WINS
server.
—
Printer
Specify the print function for SMB.
—
Printer Setting
Select whether or not the SMB port ON
is used in Print mode.
NetBIOS Name
Print Server
Register the NetBIOS name.
—
—
Register the name of the print serv-
ice.
Workgroup
Register the name of the work-
group.
—
C250P
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
SNMP
SNMP Setting
Select whether or not SNMP is
used.
OFF
If it is used, specify whether or not
“SNMP v1/v2c (IP)”, “SNMP v3
(IP)”, or “SNMP v1 (IPX)” is used.
UDP Port Number
v1/v2c Setting
Specify the UDP port number.
—
—
—
Specify the SNMP v1/v2c settings.
Read Community
Register the name of the read com-
munity. As a default, “public” is
specified.
Write Setting
Select whether to enable or disable Enable
the write permissions.
Write Community
Register the name of the write com-
munity. As a default, “private” is
specified.
—
v3 Setting
Specify the SNMP v3 settings.
Register the context name.
—
—
Context Name
Discovery Set
Select whether to enable or disable Enable
the discovery user permissions.
Read Setting
Write Setting
Specify the security level for read-
ing.
—
Specify the security level for writing.
Specify the WINS function for SMB.
—
—
TCP Socket TCP Socket
(Binary Mode)
TCP Socket Set
Select whether or not TCP socket
settings are used.
ON
—
Port No.
Register the number of the port to
be used.
SSL Setting
Port No. (SSL)
Select whether or not SSL/TLS is
used.
ON
—
Register the number of the port to
be used.
TCP Socket
(ASCII Mode)
Specify the print function for SMB.
—
TCP Socket Set
Select whether or not TCP socket
settings are used.
ON
—
Port No.
Register the number of the port to
be used.
C250P
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
http Server
http Server Set
Select whether or not the http server ON
settings are used.
PSWC Setting
Select whether or not PageScope
Web Connection is used.
ON
IPP
Specify IPP print settings.
—
IPP Setting
Select whether or not IPP printing is ON
used.
IPP Auth.
Select whether or not authentication
is performed.
—
If IPP authentication is performed,
select the authentication method.
Accept IPP Job
Support Info.
Printer Info.
Select whether or not IPP jobs are
permitted.
ON
—
Specify the print operations sup-
ported by IPP.
Specify the printer information.
—
Disable
Proof
Select whether or not to permit a connection if the period of va- Permit
lidity for the SSL sever certificate has expired when this ma-
chine is connecting to an SSL server as a client.
Network
Speed
Select the operating speed.
Auto
I/F Setting
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Parallel Timeout
Network Timeout
USB Timeout
Parallel I/F
Specify the length of time until a transmission 15 sec.
timeout occurs.
Specify the length of time until a transmission 15 sec.
timeout occurs.
Specify the length of time until a transmission 15 sec.
timeout occurs.
Specify the mode for using a parallel inter-
face.
ECP
IEEE 1284/USB
Select whether a parallel or USB interface is USB
used.
Time Adjustment
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
NTP Setting
Select whether or not the time is obtained
through NTP.
ON
NTP Server Add.
Port No.
Specify the IP address or DNS name of the
NTP server.
—
Specify the receiving port number for NTP.
123
C250P
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
System Setting
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Daylight Saving
Select whether or not the machine’s internal OFF
clock observes daylight saving time, and
specify the time difference for daylight saving
time between 1 and 150 minutes.
Auto Reset
Specify the setting (between 1 and 9 minutes 1 Min.
or “OFF”) for the desired length of time until
the automatic system reset operation is per-
formed.
Date/Time Setting
Set Date
Specify the date, time and time zone for the
machine’s internal clock.
—
“Set Date” appears only if “Time Adjustment”
in the “Admin. Setting” menu is set to “ON”.
—
!
Detail
“Set Date” appears only if “Time Adjustment” in the “Admin. Setting”
menu is set to “ON”.
If “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, the administrator is logged off from
Administrator mode according to the time specified for “Auto Reset”.
User Box Oper.
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Delete User Box
Del. Secure Doc.
Deletes boxes.
—
—
Deletes confidential documents.
C250P
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
List Output
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
List Output
Prints the list of machine settings.
—
Call Center
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Call Center
Transmits the status of the machine to the
center.
—
Security Setting
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Admin. Password
Enhanced Security
Changes the administrator password.
—
Select whether or not enhanced security
settings are applied.
OFF
Security Details
Specify detailed security settings.
Password Rules
Select whether or not password rules are
applied.
Disable
Prohibit Func.
Select the operations that are prohibited
(authentication lock) if user authentication
fails, specify the number of times that
authentication can be checked before the
operations are prohibited, and cancel
restrictions on operations.
Prohibition: Mode 1
Number of Checks:
3
HDD Setting
Performs operations concerning the HDD
drive, such as deleting data saved on the
HDD. If Security Kit is installed, settings can
be specified to encrypt the data on the HDD.
—
C250P
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Note
The operation of the “Prohibit Func.” parameter applies to the following
passwords.
Account track passwords, box passwords, passwords for confidential
documents, and the administrator password
If operation of the control panel is restricted, select “Prohibit Func.”, then
“Release Setting”, and then select the prohibited operations to be al-
lowed.
Account: Operations for user authentication and account track
Secure Print: Operations for confidential documents
User Box: Operations for boxes
SNMP: Operations for SNMP v3 Write user authentication
If the control panel cannot be operated even after canceling operation re-
strictions or if an operation is prohibited from a failed attempt to authen-
If the encryption settings are changed, the hard disk must be reformat-
ted.
!
Detail
For details on the operations available with “Enhanced Security”, refer to
“Enhanced Security” on page 4-45.
For details on the operations available with “HDD Setting”, refer to “HDD
Setting” on page 4-48.
C250P
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Enhanced Security
When the enhanced security setting is applied on this machine, various
linked security settings are set in order to increase security when managing
data. Restrictions are applied to user operations, and box operations and
print jobs are limited.
There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in or-
der for “Enhanced Security” to be set to “ON”. Before setting “Enhanced Se-
curity” to “ON”, be sure to check the settings for the security functions.
Note
If there are settings that are incompatible with the enhanced security set-
tings, “Enhanced Security” cannot be set to “ON”.
Settings
The following settings must first be specified in order to set “Enhanced Se-
curity” to “ON”.
“Admin. Setting” menu
Settings
“OpenAPI” – “SSL”
Set so that “SSL” appears.
“SSL” appears when a certificate is registered with
PageScope Web Connection.
“Security Setting” – “Admin. Password”
Specify a password that meets the password rules.
Specify the hard disk locking password.
“Security Setting” – “HDD Setting” –
“HDD Password”
*Otherwise, install the optional security
kit, and specify an encryption key.
!
Detail
Certain conditions must be met in order for the enhanced security set-
tings to be applied. For details, contact your service representative.
The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed
after “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”.
C250P
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Changed settings
4
For increased security, change the following linked settings when “Enhanced
Security” is set to “ON”.
“Admin. Setting” menu
Changed settings
“Security Setting” – “Security Details” –
“Password Rules”
Set to “Enable”.
“Security Setting” – “Security Details” –
“Prohibit Func.”
Set to “Mode 2” and three times or less for
checking.
“Security Setting” – “HDD Setting” –
“Overwrite Temp.”
Set to “Mode 2”.
Note
The number of times for checking for “Prohibit Func.” can be changed to
a number between one and three.
A changed setting cannot be changed when “Enhanced Security” is set
to “OFF”.
When “Password Rules” is set to “Enable”, a password that does not
meet the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authenti-
cation. For details on the password rules, refer to “Password Rules” on
page 4-47.
Note
When “Enhanced Security” is set to “ON”, limitations are placed on the
user for the following operations.
When password authentication has failed the number of times specified
for “No. of Tries”, the control panel can no longer be operated (authenti-
cation lock). If operation of the control panel is restricted, select “Prohibit
Func.”, then “Release Setting”, and then select the prohibited operations
to be allowed.
An application performing the write operation with SNMP v1/v2c cannot
be connected.
Write users using SNMP v3 must be authenticated.
This machine’s counter data cannot be retrieved by PageScope Net Care
or PageScope VISUALCOUNT-MASTER.
C250P
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Password Rules
4
If password rules have been applied, the following limitations are applied to
the passwords in order to increase security.
If password rules are applied and already specified passwords do not meet
the password rules, those passwords are not accepted when they are en-
tered. In that case, the administrator should temporarily turn off the pass-
word rules, then specify the passwords according to the following
conditions.
Administrator password
Limitations on the number Limitations on registering/changing
of characters
8 alphanumeric characters
(case-sensitive)
•
•
A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
Account passwords
Limitations on the number Limitations on registering/changing
of characters
8 or more alphanumeric
characters (case-sensitive)
•
•
A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
Note
When password authentication has failed the number of times specified
for “No. of Tries”, the control panel can no longer be operated (authenti-
cation lock). If operation of the control panel is restricted, select “Prohibit
Func.”, then “Release Setting”, and then select the prohibited operations
to be allowed.
Box passwords
Limitations on the number Limitations on registering/changing
of characters
8 alphanumeric characters
(case-sensitive)
•
•
A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
The same password as one before being changed cannot be
registered.
C250P
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
Confidential document passwords
4
Limitations on the number Limitations on registering/changing
of characters
8 alphanumeric characters
(case-sensitive)
•
A password that consists of a repetition of the same character
cannot be registered.
HDD Setting
The following operations can be performed from the HDD Setting screen.
HDD Password
Changes the password for using the HDD.
HDD Formatting
Formats the optional HDD.
Overwrite All
All data on the HDD is overwritten.
Reminder
Overwrite all data before disposing of the machine. Before performing
this operation, be sure to consult with your service representative.
Overwrite Temp.
Select “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” as the method for overwriting data on the HDD.
With “Mode 1”, the data is overwritten once with simple data. With “Mode 2”,
the data is overwritten many times.
!
Detail
With all operations for computer printing, image data is temporarily writ-
ten to the HDD.
By selecting the “Overwrite Temp.” parameter, the area of the HDD
where image data is saved can be overwritten after the data is printed,
and the data can be erased. This process prevents disclosure of image
data on the HDD.
C250P
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
O.W. Priority
Select the priority setting for overwriting temporary data when the security
kit is installed. Select “Encryption” to perform high-level security encryption
processing. However, data overwriting with encryption of the HDD differs de-
pending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Normally, “Encryp-
tion” is selected.
If “Overwrite” is selected, data overwriting with encryption of the HDD is per-
formed depending on whether “Mode 1” or “Mode 2” is selected. Select this
setting when the format of the data written to the HDD is considered impor-
tant.
1
2
In the O.W. Priority screen, select “Encryption” or “Overwrite”.
When the “Encryption” or “Overwrite” setting is changed, follow the in-
structions in the screen to restart the machine.
3
If an encryption key error appears, select the parameter from the Ad-
min. Setting screen to format the HDD.
!
Detail
When the “Encryption” or “Overwrite” setting is changed, the HDD must
be formatted.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the main power switch on after turning it off. The machine may not
operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
C250P
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
Encryption Key
Specify encryption of the HDD when the security kit is installed. When a set-
ting is specified, all data written to the HDD is encrypted to protect it. If the
encryption key is changed, the HDD must be reformatted.
1
In the Encryption Key screen, type in the encryption key (20 characters
long).
2
3
4
Retype the encryption key entered in step 1.
Follow the instructions in the screen to restart the machine.
If an encryption key error appears, select the parameter from the Ad-
min. Setting screen to format the HDD.
Reminder
The setting for the “Encryption Key” parameter must be specified by the
machine’s administrator.
!
Detail
The encryption key must contain 20 characters, and cannot contain the
same character repeated 20 times.
Be sure to keep the specified encryption key in a safe place so that it will
not be lost.
Reminder
When turning the machine off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds to
turn the main power switch on after turning it off. The machine may not
operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
C250P
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
OpenAPI
4
Parameters
Description
Initial Setting
Access Setting
Select whether or not OpenAPI access is en- Permit
abled.
Port No.
Specify the port number.
—
Port No. (SSL)
SSL
Specify the port number (SSL).
Select whether or not SSL is enabled.
50003
ON
Authentication
Select whether or not user authentication is
performed.
OFF
Data Capture
Parameter
Description
Initial Setting
Data Capture
Select whether or not data for a print job can Permit
be captured.
Banner Printing
Use this parameter to select whether or not banner paper printing is per-
formed.
Parameter
Description
Initial Setting
Banner Printing
Select whether or not banner paper printing
is performed.
OFF
C250P
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control panel settings
4
C250P
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Loading copy paper
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
5
Loading copy paper
5.1
Paper
Use paper that meets the following specifications.
Possible paper sizes
Non-standard-sized paper:
Paper Source
Bypass tray*
Tray 1
Paper Width
Paper Length
3-1/2 inch to 12-1/4 inch
5-1/2 inch to 18 inch
Tray 2
—
—
Single/Double paper feed
cabinets
LCT
Double-sided prints
5-1/2 inch to 12-1/4 inch
5-3/4 inch to 18 inch
* Banner paper
Paper width: 8-1/4 inch to 11-3/4 inch
Paper length: 18 inch to 47-1/4 inch
Standard-sized paper:
Paper Source
Paper Size
*1
Bypass tray
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 8 × 13 w , 12-1/4 × 18 w (A3
Wide), A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
*1
Tray 1
Tray 2
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 8 × 13 w , 12-1/4 × 18 w (A3
Wide), A3 w to B6 w, A6 w
11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, A3 w to B5 w/v
Single/Double paper feed
cabinets
LCT
8-1/2 × 11 v
*1
Double-sided prints
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w, 8-1/2 × 13 w
12-1/4 × 18 w (A3 Wide), A3 w to A5 w
,
Finisher FS-603
Exit tray 1:
“Group” setting: 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w
(A3 Wide)
“Sort” setting: 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 v
“Staple” setting: 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
Exit tray 2: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w
C250P
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Paper Source
Paper Size
Finisher FS-501
Exit tray 1:
“Group”/“Sort” setting: 11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v,
12-1/4 × 18 w (A3 Wide)
Exit tray 2:
“Offset/Group” setting, “Offset/Sort” setting:
11 × 17 w to 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w (A3 Wide)
“Staple” setting: 11 × 17 w to 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w/v
Job separator JS-601
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Finisher FS-514
Finishing tray 1, 2 and optional Output Tray
11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w (A3
Output Tray OT-601
wide w)
“Group”/“Sort” settings: 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
Staple settings: 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
*2
Punch settings
:
2-hole: 11 × 17 w to 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
3-hole: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 v
Saddle Stitcher SD-503
Mailbin Kit MT-501
Fold & staple: 11× 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w
8-1/2 × 11 v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Print exit tray (standard)
11 × 17 w to 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w (A3 Wide),
A3 w to B6 w, A6 w,
*1
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 × 330 mm, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8-1/4 × 13 w,
8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w and 8 × 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be selected. For
details, contact the technical representative.
*2
Can be used when optional punch kit is installed on Finisher.
C250P
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Paper types and paper capacities
5
Paper Type
Weight (lb)
Plain
Paper
Thick
Paper 1
Thick
Paper 2
Thick
Paper 3
16 lb to 24 24-1/4 lb
lb
40-1/4 lb
to
55-3/4 lb
to
to
40 lb
55-1/2 lb
68 lb
Paper Source, Etc.
Bypass tray
100 sheets 10 sheets
or less
10 sheets
or less
10 sheets
or less
Tray 1
Tray 2
250 sheets 20 sheets
or less
20 sheets
or less
20 sheets
or less
500 sheets
—
—
—
Single/Double paper feed 500
cabinets
sheets/
1,000
—
—
—
sheets
LCT
2,500
sheets
—
—
—
Double-sided prints
o
o
o
o
Paper Type
Overhead
Projector
Transpare
ncies
Postcards Envelopes Label
Sheets
Banner
Paper
33-3/4 lb
to
42-1/2 lb
Paper Source, Etc.
Bypass tray
10 sheets
or less
(8-1/2 × 11
v only)
10 sheets
or less
10
10 sheets
or less
1 sheet
envelopes
or less
Tray 1
Tray 2
20 sheets
or less
(8-1/2 × 11
v only)
20 sheets
or less
10
20 sheets
or less
envelopes
or less
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Single/Double paper feed
cabinets
LCT
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Double-sided prints
C250P
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Special paper
5
Paper other than plain paper, such as overhead projector transparencies and
colored paper, is called special paper. Be sure to select a special paper set-
ting for paper trays loaded with media such as overhead projector transpar-
encies and colored paper in order to prevent operating errors.
Paper Type
Description
Single Side Only
Select this setting when the paper that is loaded should not be used
with double-sided printing (for example, when one side has already
been printed on).
A paper tray with this setting is given priority when the “Auto Paper
Select” setting is specified.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected during
double-sided printing.
OHP
Select this setting when overhead projector transparencies are
loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Special Paper
Thick 1
Select this setting when special paper, for example, high-quality pa-
per, is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 16 lb to 24 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight
of 24-1/4 lb to 40 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Thick 2
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight
of 40-1/4 lb to 55-1/2 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Thick 3
Select this setting when the thick paper that is loaded has a weight
of 55-3/4 lb to 68 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Letterhead
Colored Paper
Envelope
Select this setting when paper already printed with a company name
or preset text is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 16 lb to 24 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Select this setting when colored paper is loaded as plain paper with
a weight of 16 lb to 24 lb.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
Select this setting when envelopes are loaded.
A paper tray with this setting is not automatically selected when the
“Auto Paper Select” setting is specified or when the paper trays are
switched automatically.
C250P
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Paper Type
Description
Duplex
2nd-Side
Normal
Thick 1
Thick 2
Thick 3
Select these settings when loading paper that has already been
printed on one side.
“Duplex 2nd-Side” can be selected only normal, thick 1, thick 2 or
thick 3 paper is loaded in the Tray 1 or the bypass tray.
!
Detail
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to “Paper Tray” on page 4-32.
C250P
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Precautions for paper
5
The following types of paper should not be used, otherwise decreased print
quality, paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur.
-
Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through
the machine (even if the transparency is still blank)
Paper that has been printed on by a heat-transfer printer or an inkjet
printer
-
-
-
-
-
-
Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin
Folded, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper
Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time
Damp paper, perforated paper, or paper with punched holes
Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper, or paper with an uneven
surface
-
Paper that has been treated, such as carbon-backed, heat-sensitive or
pressure-sensitive paper
-
-
-
-
-
Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing
Paper of a non-standard shape (not rectangular)
Paper that is bound with glue, staples or paper clips
Paper with labels attached
Paper with ribbons, hooks, buttons, etc. attached
Paper storage
Observe the following precautions when storing the paper.
-
Store paper in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
If the paper becomes damp, paper misfeeds may occur.
Paper that has not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a
plastic bag and stored in a cool, dark location with little humidity.
Store the paper laying flat, not standing on its edge.
Curled paper may cause paper misfeeds.
-
-
-
Keep paper out of the reach of children.
C250P
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Print area
Any part of the image within the area indicated below is not copied.
-
-
-
A margin 3/16 inch from the leading edge of the paper (A)
A margin 3/16 inch from the trailing edge of the paper (B)
A margin 3/16 inch on both sides of the paper (C)
B
A
C
C
A: 3/16 inch
B: 3/16 inch
C: 3/16 inch
Auto tray switch feature
If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a
different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions,
the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue. If the
optional LCT is installed, a maximum of 3,400 pages (with 8-1/2 × 11 vpa-
per) can be made continuously. (The paper tray is automatically switched
only if the “Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF” parameter in the Utility mode is set to
“Allow”.)
Operating conditions
-
-
-
-
The paper is the same size.
The paper is positioned in the same orientation.
The paper is the same type.
Paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically
switched.
!
Detail
For details on the specifying the paper trays that are selected when the
paper tray is automatically switched, refer to “User Setting” on
page 4-33.
C250P
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Order for selecting the paper trays
5
As a factory default, when a different paper tray is automatically selected, the
next paper tray in the following list is chosen.
Tray 2 → Tray 3 → Tray 4 → Tray 1
!
Detail
To change the order in which the paper trays are selected, refer to “User
Setting” on page 4-33.
C250P
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
5.2
Loading copy paper
Loading paper into the Tray 1
To load paper (Tray 1)
1
2
Pull out the Tray 1.
Press down on the pa-
per-lifting plate until it
locks into place.
Paper-lifting
plate
Paper take-up
roller
3
Slide the lateral guides
to fit the size of paper to
be loaded.
Lateral guide
How can paper of a
?
non-standard sizebe
loaded?
% First load the paper,
and then adjust the
lateral guides to the
size of the loaded
paper.
C250P
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
For paper exceeding 11
5
4
× 17 size, adjust the trail-
ing-edge guides as
shown in the illustration.
Trailing-edge
guide
Trailing-edge
guide
5
Load the paper into the
tray so that the side of
the paper to be printed
on (the side facing up
when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
, mark
–
Load letterhead pa-
per so that the side
to be printed on fac-
es down.
What should be done
if the paper is curled?
?
% Flatten the paper be-
fore loading it.
How many sheets can be loaded?
?
% No more than 250 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. No more
than 20 sheets of thick paper, overhead projector transparencies,
postcards, label sheets or envelopes can be loaded.
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the ,mark.
6
Close the Tray 1.
–
If envelopes are loaded, continue with step 7.
C250P
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Pull up the upper right-
5
7
8
9
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
Push up the fusing unit
cover.
Push down the left and
right releaseleversM2 to
the
position.
M2
M2
10 Close the fusing unit cover.
C250P
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
11 Close the upper right-side door.
After printing envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers
to their center positions.
–
!
Detail
When loading paper exceeding 11 × 17 size into the Tray 1, the paper can
have a width up to 12-1/4 inch and a length up to 18 inch.
For details on specifying the paper size for the Tray 1, refer to “Paper
Tray” on page 4-32.
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to “Paper Tray” on page 4-32.
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your
hands.
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the
paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral
guides to the size of the loaded paper.
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is
removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed,
otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may
occur.
When loading envelopes, load them in the worientation with the flap side
down, as shown in the illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the
flap side up, a paper misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes
cannot be printed on.
C250P
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the vori-
entation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector
transparencies in the worientation.
When loading postcards, load them in the worientation, as shown in the
illustration. Do not load postcards in the vorientation.
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
down.
C250P
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Loading paper into Tray 2, 3, or 4
To load paper (Tray 2, 3, or 4)
5
1
2
Pull out the paper tray.
Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper to be loaded.
Lateral
guide
Film
3
Load the paper into the
tray so that the side of
, mark
the paper to be printed
on (the side facing up
when the package was
unwrapped) faces up.
C250P
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
–
Load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces down.
What should be done if the paper is curled?
?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
How many sheets can be loaded?
?
% No more than 500 sheets of plain paper can be loaded. In addition,
no more than 150 sheets of thick paper can be loaded.
% Do not load so many sheets of plain paper that the top of the stack
is higher than the ,mark.
4
Close the paper tray.
C250P
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Reminder
If the lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper, the
paper size will not be correctly detected. Be sure to adjust the lateral
guides to the size of the loaded paper.
For details on the paper that can be loaded into Tray 2, 3, and 4, refer to
“Paper” on page 5-2.
Be careful not to touch the film.
Note
To print on overhead projector transparencies and envelopes, use the by-
pass tray or the Tray 1.
!
Detail
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to “Paper Tray” on page 4-32.
C250P
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Loading paper into the LCT
To load paper (LCT)
5
0 If the [Power] is turned off, the LCT cannot be pulled out, even after the
tray release button is pressed. Be sure that the machine is turned on with
the [Power].
1
Press the tray release
button.
2
Pull out the LCT.
C250P
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Load the paper into the
5
3
right side of the LCT so
that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side
facing up when the
,mark
package was un-
wrapped) faces up.
What should be done
?
if the paper is curled?
% Flatten the paper be-
Film
fore loading it.
4
Load the paper into the
left side of the LCT so
that the side of the paper
to be printed on (the side
facing up when the
, mark
package was un-
wrapped) faces up.
–
Load letterhead pa-
per so that the side to be printed on faces down.
5
Close the LCT.
C250P
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
Do not load so many sheets of paper that the top of the stack is higher
than the , mark.
For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT, refer to “Paper”
on page 5-2.
!
Detail
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to “Paper Tray” on page 4-32.
Note
If the machine has entered Low Power mode or Sleep mode, the LCT
cannot be pulled out, even after the tray release button is pressed. Be
sure to first cancel Low Power mode or Sleep mode.
C250P
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Loading paper into the bypass tray
5
Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to print onto
paper that is not loaded into a paper tray, or if you wish to print onto thick
paper, postcards, envelopes, overhead projector transparencies or label
sheets.
To load paper (bypass tray)
1
Open the bypass tray.
–
When loading large-
sized paper, pull out
the tray extension.
Tray extenstion
2
3
With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much
as possible into the feed slot.
What should be done if the paper is curled?
?
% Flatten the paper before loading it.
Slide the lateral guides
to fit the size of paper
being loaded.
–
If envelopes are
loaded, continue
with step 4.
Lateral
guides
C250P
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Pull up the upper right-
5
4
5
6
7
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
Push up the fusing unit
cover.
Push down the left and
right releaseleversM2 to
the
position.
M2
M2
Close the fusing unit cover.
C250P
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Close the upper right-side door.
5
8
Reminder
After printing on envelopes, return the left and right M2 release levers to
their center positions, otherwise decreased image quality may result
when printing on plain paper.
When printing on paper other than plain paper, specify the paper type
from the printer driver.
Do not load so many sheets that the top of the stack is higher than the
+mark.
Push the paper guides firmly up against the edges of the paper.
When loading postcards, load them in the worientation, as shown in the
illustration. Do not load postcards in the vorientation.
A maximum of 10 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray.
C250P
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
When loading overhead projector transparencies, load them in the vori-
entation, as shown in the illustration. Do not load overhead projector
transparencies in the worientation.
A maximum of 10 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into
the bypass tray.
C250P
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Before loading envelopes, press them down to make sure that all air is
5
removed, and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed,
otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may
occur.
When loading envelopes, load them with the flap side up, as shown in the
illustration. If the envelopes are loaded with the flap side down, a paper
misfeed may occur. The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on.
A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray.
Flap side
When loading label sheets, load them in the worientation, as shown in
the illustration. Do not load label sheets in the vorientation.
C250P
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
A maximum of 10 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray.
5
Side to be
printed on
Be sure to load letterhead paper so that the side to be printed on faces
up.
Note
the paper is loaded into the bypass tray.
!
Detail
For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray, refer to “User
Setting” on page 4-33.
For details on the paper sizes, refer to “Paper” on page 5-2.
If special paper is loaded, the paper type setting must be specified. For
details, refer to “Paper Tray” on page 4-32.
C250P
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
5.3
Specifying finishing settings
If the optional finisher is installed, the machine can be set to finish the pages
after printing them.
The Finishing settings can be specified from the printer driver.
Stapling prints (Staple settings)
!
Detail
In order for the prints to be stapled, all of the following conditions must
be met.
- The paper width must be between 7-1/4 inch and 11-3/4 inch.
- The paper length must be between 7-1/4 inch and 17 inch when finisher
FS-603 is installed or between 5-3/4 inch and 17 inch when finisher FS-
514.
Prints can be fed out stapled either in the corner or at two places.
Reminder
Pages can be fed out stapled together only if a finisher is installed.
When Finisher FS-603 is installed
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Loading Capacity (detected with ei-
ther measurement)
16 lb to 24 lb
8-1/2 × 11 w/v
1,000 sheets
500 sheets
6 inch
3 inch
11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w
Number of Bound Pages
Maximum Number of Sets
One place
towards the
back
One place
towards the
front
Two places
8-1/2 ×
11 wor
smaller
2 sheets
100 sets
80 sets
60 sets
30 sets
30 sets
40 sets
40 sets
40 sets
30 sets
30 sets
40 sets
40 sets
40 sets
30 sets
30 sets
3 to 5 sheets
6 to 10 sheets
11 to 20 sheets
21 to 30 sheets
31 to 50 sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
C250P
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
Number of Bound Pages
Maximum Number of Sets
One place
towards the
back
One place
towards the
front
Two places
8-1/2 ×
14 wor
larger
2 sheets
100 sets
80 sets
40 sets
50 sets
40 sets
40 sets
50 sets
40 sets
40 sets
3 to 5 sheets
6 to 10 sheets
11 to 20 sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
21 to 25 sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
30 sets/1,000
sheets
When Finisher FS-501 is installed
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Loading Capacity (detected with ei-
ther measurement)
16 lb to 24 lb
8-1/2 × 11 w/v,
7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w/v
1,000 sheets
6 inch
11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w
500 sheets
3 inch
Number of Bound Pages
2 sheets
Maximum Number of Sets
100 sets
80 sets
60 sets
40 sets
33 sets
200 sheets
400 sheets
600 sheets
800 sheets
3 to 5 sheets
6 to 10 sheets
11 to 20 sheets
21 to 30 sheets
1,000 sheets
When Finisher FS-514 is installed
Tray
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Loading Capacity
Finishing tray 1
13-1/4 lb to 24 lb
24-1/4 lb to 32 lb
13-1/4 lb to 24 lb
24-1/4 lb to 32 lb
11 × 17 wto
8-1/2 × 11 w
1-1/4 inch
Finishing tray 2
11 × 17 wto
8-1/2 × 11 w
A4 wor less: 5-1/4 inch
B4 wor more: 2-1/2 inch
Optional finishing tray 13-1/4 lb to 24 lb
24-1/4 lb to 32 lb
11 × 17 wto
8-1/2 × 11 w
1 inch
Number of Bound Pages
Examples of the possible number of bound pages are listed below.
-
-
-
50 sheets of 24 lb paper
2 sheets of 55-1/2 lb paper + 48 sheets of 24 lb paper
Maximum of 30 sheets of 24-1/4 to 40 lb paper
C250P
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Punching holes in prints (Punch settings)
5
!
Detail
In order for holes to be punched in the prints, all of the following condi-
tions must be met.
The paper width must be 8-1/2 inch or between 11 inch and 11-3/4 inch
(with the “2-Hole” punch setting).
The paper width must be between 11 inch and 11-3/4 inch (with the “3-
Hole” punch setting).
The paper length must be between 7-1/4 inch and 17 inch
Note
The hole punch function is available only when optional finisher FS-603
and punch kit PK-501 are installed or when optional finisher FS-514 and
punch kit PK-510 are installed.
Paper Weight
Paper Size
16 lb to 55-1/2 lb
11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
C250P
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
Specifying center binding
5
The paper that is fed out can be folded in half and stapled at two places
along the vertical center.
!
Detail
In order for pages to be bound at the center, all of the following condi-
tions must be met.
The paper width must be between 8-1/4 inch and 11-3/4 inch.
The paper length must be between 11 inch and 17 inch.
When Finisher FS-603 is installed
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Number of Bound Pages
*
16 lb to 24 lb
8-1/2 × 11 w, 11 × 17 w 2 sheets to 15 sheets
Number of Bound Pages
2 sheets to 5 sheets
Maximum Number of Sets
20 sets
10 sets
10 sets
6 sheets to 10 sheets
11 sheets to 15 sheets*
*
The number of sheets that can be bound together differs depending on the paper weight.
17 lb paper: 15 sheets
21-1/4 lb paper: 10 sheets
!
Detail
In order for prints to be bound at the center or folded in half, all of the fol-
lowing conditions must be met.
- The paper width must be between 7-1/4 inch and 11-3/4 inch.
- The paper length must be between 10 inch and 17 inch.
C250P
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
When Finisher FS-514 is installed
5
Paper Weight
Paper Size
Loading Capacity (detected in
either measurement)
13-1/4 lb to 24 lb
8-1/2 × 11 w, 11 × 17 w 200 sheets or 20 sets
24-1/4 lb to 55-1/2 lb
—
Number of Bound Pages
Examples of the possible number of bound pages are listed below.
-
-
2 to 15 sheets of 24 lb paper (maximum of 60 pages)
1 sheet of 13-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb paper + 14 sheets of 13-1/4 to 24 lb paper
(maximum of 60 pages)
-
-
-
Maximum of 13 sheets of 24-1/4 to 32 lb paper
Maximum of 10 sheets of 32-1/4 to 40 lb paper
Maximum of 8 sheets of 40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb paper
Note
Binding is possible only if the finisher FS-603 or if saddle stitcher is in-
stalled on optional finisher FS-514 is installed.
Folding is possible only if the saddle stitcher is installed on optional fin-
isher FS-514.
C250P
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading copy paper
5
C250P
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Replacing consumables
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
6
Replacing consumables
6.1
Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner is about to run out, the advanced warning message shown
below appears.
!
Detail
About 1000 (8-1/2 × 11) pages can be printed after the message “Toner
near empty” appears.
When the message appears, prepare to replace the toner cartridge ac-
cording to your maintenance agreement.
When the message “Toner Empty” appears, the machine stops operat-
ing.
C250P
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
When the toner is empty, the warning message shown below appears and
6
printing is no longer possible.
Note
When the message appears, replace the toner cartridge according to
your maintenance agreement.
When the message “Toner Empty Call Service.” appears, contact the
service representative.
7 CAUTION
Handling toner and the toner cartridges
%
Do not throw toner or the toner cartridge into a fire.
%
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
%
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your
clothes or hands.
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with
soap and water.
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then
seek professional medical attention.
C250P
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
Reminder
Do not replace the toner cartridge until the message “Toner Empty” ap-
pears. In addition, do not replace the toner cartridge of any color other
than the one indicated in the message on the control panel.
C250P
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
To replace the toner cartridge
6
The procedure for replacing any of the toner cartridges (yellow (Y), magenta
(M), cyan (C) or black (K)) is the same.
Example: Replacing the black toner cartridge
0 When replacing the black toner cartridge, be sure to replace filter 2. A
new filter 2 is included in the package with the black toner cartridge.
0 When replacing the black
toner cartridge, be sure to
clean the electrostatic
charger wire.
For details on cleaning the
electrostatic charger wire,
refer to “Electrostatic
charger wire” on page 7-4.
1
Open the machine’s
front door.
C250P
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Pull up the locking tab of
6
2
the empty toner car-
tridge to unlock it. Pull
out the toner cartridge
as far as possible, and
then pull it up to remove
it.
How should used
?
toner cartridges be
disposed of?
% Do not throw away
used toner cartridg-
es. Instead, keep
them in their boxes to be collected by your technical representative.
3
Prepare the new toner
cartridge.
–
Make sure that the
toner cartridge is the
same color as the la-
bel in the cartridge
compartment.
What happens if the
toner cartridge of a
different color is in-
stalled?
?
% The toner cartridge
of a color different
than the one that was removed cannot be installed. If the wrong
toner cartridge is installed with extreme force, the machine may be
damaged.
C250P
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
4
Remove the new toner
cartridge from its pack-
aging, and then shake
the cartridge up and
down 5 to 10 times.
–
The toner within the
toner cartridge may
have become com-
pacted. If it has, be
sure to shake the
toner cartridge until
the toner is mostly
broken up before in-
stalling the cartridge.
5
Align the toner cartridge
with the slots in the ma-
chine, and then insert
the cartridge until the
locking tab locks into
place.
–
When inserting the
new toner cartridge,
fully insert it until it
snaps into place.
6
Close the front door.
Why can’t the door
?
be closed securely?
% Check that the toner
cartridge is fully in-
serted.
C250P
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
Note
Check that a toner cartridge of the same color as the one to be replaced
has been prepared.
Reminder
Be careful about the installation location of the toner cartridges, since it
is different for other colors.
The shape of the black toner cartridge is different from the shapes of the
toner cartridges for the other colors.
Reminder
When installing the new filter 2, fully insert it until it snaps into place.
C250P
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
6.2
Replacing the staples
When Finisher is installed and is about to run out of staples, the message
shown below appears.
!
Detail
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
C250P
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
To replace the staple cartridge for Finisher FS-501
6
1
2
3
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
Turn the jammed-staple-
clearing dial to the left in
order to position stapler
at the center.
Pull the staple cartridge
holder toward you from
stapler.
Stapler
Staple cartridge
holders
C250P
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
4
Remove the staple car-
tridge from the staple
case.
Staple
cartridge
5
Load the new staple car-
tridge into the staple car-
tridge holder.
–
Fully insert the staple
cartridge as far as
possible.
6
Peel the tape off of the
staple cartridge.
C250P
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Insert the staple car-
6
7
tridge holder until it locks
into place.
8
Slide the finisher back against the machine.
Reminder
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
C250P
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
To replace the staple cartridge for Finisher FS-603
6
1
Open the front door of
the finisher.
2
Turn misfeed-clearing
dial 1 clockwise until the
removal indicator is
completely blue.
Removal indicator
What should be done
?
if misfeed-clearing
dial 1 is turned too
far?
% Turn the misfeed-
clearing dial 1 coun-
terclockwise to finely
adjust it.
Misfeed-
clearing
dial 1
C250P
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Slowly pull out the sta-
6
3
4
5
pler unit as far as possi-
ble.
Stapler unit
Grasp both sides of the
staple cartridge holder,
lift it up, and then pull it
out.
Staple cartridge holder
Press the button marked
“PUSH” on the side of
the staple cartridge
holder.
Staple cartridge
holder
Staple case
The staple case is re-
leased.
PUSH
C250P
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Pull up the staple case.
6
6
7
8
Remove the staple car-
tridge from the staple
case.
Staple
cartridge
Load the new staple car-
tridge into the staple car-
tridge holder.
–
Fully insert the staple
cartridge as far as
possible.
C250P
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
9
Press the staple case
down.
10 Peel the tape off of the
staple cartridge.
11 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, making
sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the
rails in the compartment.
C250P
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
12 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder until it locks
into place.
–
Check that the staple
cartridge holder is
securely installed.
13 Carefully move the stapler unit back into its original position.
14 Close the front door.
Reminder
Be sure to replace the staple cartridge only after the message appears,
otherwise the machine may be damaged.
C250P
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
To replace the staple cartridge in the Finisher FS-514
6
1
Open the front door.
2
Remove the staple car-
tridge holder.
–
Pull the staple car-
tridge holder toward
you to remove it.
Only touch the blue
parts of the staple
cartridge.
–
3
Remove the empty car-
tridge from the staple
cartridge holder.
C250P
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Load the new staple car-
6
4
tridge into the staple car-
tridge holder.
–
Do not remove the
remaining staples,
otherwise the ma-
chine will not be able
to staple after the
cartridge is replaced.
5
Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, making
sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the
rails in the compartment.
–
Check that the staple
cartridge holder is
securely installed.
6
Close the front door.
Reminder
Replace the staple cartridge only after the message has appeared.
If the staple cartridge is replaced before the message appears, the ma-
chine may be damaged.
C250P
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher
6
1
Raise the print output
tray, and then push
down the staple car-
tridge holder and re-
move it.
2
Press in the area marked
“PUSH” to unlock the
staple cartridge holder.
PUSH
C250P
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Remove the empty sta-
6
3
ple cartridge from the
staple cartridge holder.
4
Load the new staple car-
tridge into the staple car-
tridge holder.
C250P
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Slowly pull off the seal.
6
5
6
Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, and then
push it up until it locks
into place.
–
When inserting the
staple cartridge
holder, be sure to in-
sert it so that it faces
the correct direction.
7
8
Return the print output tray to its original position.
Pull the handle of the
misfeed-clearing door to
open it, and then close it.
C250P
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
6.3
Replacing the waste toner box
When it is almost time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable
by the user), the message shown in the following illustration appears, warn-
ing about the replacement period.
Reminder
When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part ac-
cording to your maintenance agreement.
!
Detail
The number of prints that can be made from the time that the message
“Waste Toner nearly full.” appears until the time that the message “Waste
Toner Full Please replace.” appears differs depending on the specified
print settings and the part/supplies.
When it is time to replace the waste toner box (and if it is replaceable by the
user), the message “Waste Toner Full Please replace.” appears and the ma-
chine stops operating.
C250P
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
To replace the waste toner box
Follow the procedure described below to replace the waste toner box.
1
2
3
Open the machine’s
front door.
Pull the waste toner re-
lease lever.
Remove the waste toner
box.
C250P
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
Install the new waste
6
4
5
6
toner box.
Remove filter 1, and then
install the new filter 1.
Close the front door.
C250P
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing consumables
6
7 CAUTION
Handling toner and the toner cartridges
%
Do not throw toner or the waste toner box into a fire.
%
Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns.
7 CAUTION
Precautions for toner spills
%
%
%
Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your
clothes or hands.
If your hands become soiled with toner, immediately wash them with
soap and water.
If toner gets in your eyes, immediately flush them with water, and then
seek professional medical attention.
Reminder
Do not tilt the removed waste toner box, otherwise waste toner may spill.
Do not throw away used waste toner boxes. Instead, keep them in their
boxes to be collected by your technical representative.
C250P
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Maintenance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
7
7
Maintenance
7.1
Cleaning
This section describes the procedures for cleaning each part.
Housing
1
Clean the surface of the
housing by wiping it with
a soft cloth dampened
with a mild household
detergent.
Reminder
Be sure to turn off the machine (set the power switch to “o”) before
cleaning it.
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the housing.
C250P
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Control panel
7
%
Clean the control panel
by wiping it with a soft,
dry cloth.
Ready
Error
Menu
Cancel
Reminder
Pressing too hard on a key in the control panel may damage it. In addi-
tion, never use a mild household detergent, glass cleaner, benzene or
thinner to clean the control panel.
Paper take-up roller
Clean the paper take-up
%
rollers by wiping them
with a soft, dry cloth.
Reminder
Never use solvents, such as benzene or thinner, to clean the paper take-
up roller.
C250P
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Electrostatic charger wire
7
If the electrostatic charger wire is dirty, streaks will appear though the printed
images. If this occurs, follow the procedure described below to clean the
electrostatic charger wire.
1
2
Open the machine’s front door.
Slowly pull out the
charger-cleaning tool as
far as possible. Next,
slowly push in the charg-
er-cleaning tool as much
as possible. Repeat the
above operations three
times.
3
Securely insert each charger-cleaning tool, and then close the front
door.
C250P
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Print head
7
If the print head becomes dirty, decreased print quality may result. If this oc-
curs, clean the print head according to the following procedure.
1
2
Open the machine’s front door.
Remove the cleaning
tool from the machine’s
front door.
3
Insert the cleaning tool
into the print head clean-
ing opening, pull it out,
and then repeat this
back and forth move-
ment two or three times.
C250P
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Emptying the waste containers
7
If the hole-punch waste container in punch kit installed on Finisher FS-603
becomes full, the message shown below appears (if it can be emptied by the
user).
Note
When the message “Punch Scrap Full Call Service.” appears, contact the
service representative.
The setting for the message contents for emptying the hole-punch waste
container must be specified by the service representative. For details,
contact the service representative.
!
Detail
If the hole-punch waste container becomes full, printing cannot be per-
formed with a Punch setting. To continue printing, empty the hole-punch
waste container or cancel the Punch setting.
C250P
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
To empty the hole-punch waste container in Finisher FS-603
7
Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste con-
tainer.
1
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
2
Pull out the hole-punch
waste container.
C250P
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
7
3
Empty the hole-punch
waste container.
4
5
Install the hole-punch waste container into its original position.
Slide the finisher back against the machine.
C250P
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
To empty the hole-punch waste container in Finisher FS-514
7
Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole-punch waste con-
tainer.
1
Open the front door.
2
Pull out the hole-punch
waste container FN3.1.
C250P
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
7
3
Empty the hole-punch
waste container.
4
5
Insert the hole-punch waste container at its original position.
Close the front door.
C250P
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
7
C250P
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Troubleshooting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8
Troubleshooting
8.1
When the message “Trouble” appears (call technical
representative)
If a malfunction that cannot be corrected by the user occurred, the message
“Trouble C-xxxx Call Service.” appears. (call technical representative screen)
To call the technical representative
1
2
Write down the malfunction code (for example, C-0001) in the call tech-
nical representative screen.
Use the power switch to
turn off the machine.
3
4
Unplug the machine.
Contact the technical representative, and inform them of the malfunc-
tion code.
C250P
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Reminder
Since the machine may be damaged, contact the technical representa-
tive according to the procedure described above as soon as the call tech-
nical representative screen appears.
C250P
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.2
When the message “Paper Misfeed at” appears
If a misfeed occurs during printing, the message “Paper Misfeed at” appears
and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen. (misfeed screen)
At this time, printing cannot continue until the misfeed is adequately cleared.
Note
The procedure for clearing a misfed paper differs depending on where
the misfeed occurs. Determine the misfeed location, and then clear the
misfeed according to the appropriate procedure.
C250P
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Paper misfeed indications
8
9
1
2
3
4
10
5
6
7
8
No.
1
Code
Description
JG, JH
A paper misfeed in the fusing unit (p. 8-17)
A paper misfeed in the main unit (p. 8-14)
A paper misfeed in the bypass tray (p. 8-7)
A paper misfeed in the LCT (p. 8-12)
A paper misfeed in the ADU (p. 8-8)
A paper misfeed in the tray 1 (p. 8-9)
A paper misfeed in the tray 2 (p. 8-10)
A paper misfeed in the tray 3 or 4 (p. 8-11)
2
JF, JG
3
JE
4
JC
5
JI
6
JA
7
JB
8
JC, JD
9
JJ, JK, JL, JT
JJ, JK, JQ JR, JS
A paper misfeed in Finisher FS-501/job separator (p. 8-26)
A paper misfeed in finisher FS-603 (p. 8-31)
10
C250P
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
11
12
13
No.
11
Code
Description
JS
A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher (p. 8-41)
A paper misfeed in the mailbin (p. 8-39)
A paper misfeed in Finisher FS-514 (p. 8-35)
12
JU
13
JJ, JK, JL, JS
C250P
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray
8
1
Remove all paper from
the bypass tray.
2
If the misfed paper can-
not be removed, open
the upper right-side
door, and then carefully
pull out any misfed pa-
per.
3
Close the upper right-side door.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit
8
1
Open the automatic du-
plex unit door.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
Close the automatic duplex unit door.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the Tray 1
8
1
Pull up the upper right-
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
4
5
Close the upper right-side door.
Pull out the Tray 1, and then remove any misfed paper.
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller with your
hands.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed
indications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the Tray 2
8
1
Pull up the center right-
side door release lever,
and then open the center
right-side door.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
4
5
Close the center right-side door.
Pull out the Tray 2, and then remove any misfed paper.
Close the Tray 2.
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film with your hands.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed
indications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in a paper tray (Tray 3 or 4)
8
1
Pull up the lower right-
side door release lever,
and then open the lower
right-side door.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
4
5
Close the lower right-side door.
Pull out the paper tray, and then remove any misfed paper.
Close the paper tray.
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT
8
1
Pull up the lower right-
side door release lever,
and then open the lower
right-side door.
2
Carefully pull out any
misfed paper.
3
4
Close the lower right-side door.
Press the tray release button, pull out the LCT, and then remove any
misfed paper.
5
Close the LCT.
C250P
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the film.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the right-side door
8
1
Pull out the paper tray
being used, and then re-
move any paper remain-
ing in the tray.
Paper
take-up
roller
2
3
Load the paper into the paper tray again, and then close the tray.
Pull up the upper right-
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
4
Open inside cover M1.
M1
C250P
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pull out any paper
8
5
caught in the timing roll-
er section.
Timing
roller
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and di-
als may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool
the skin under cold water, and then seek professional med-
ical attention.
Fusing unit
C250P
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical repre-
sentative.
The paper is wrapped around the timing roller.
The paper is folded or shredded by the timing roller.
Reminder
Be careful not to touch the surface of the paper take-up roller (in the
tray 1) or the film (in the tray 2, 3, and 4 and in the LCT) with your hands.
Reminder
Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt
or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface
of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller.
Image
transfer
belt
Image
transfer
roller
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit
8
1
2
3
Pull up the upper right-
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
Push up the fusing unit
cover, and then pull out
any misfed paper.
Push up the M2 release
levers.
–
Since the M2 release
levers may be diffi-
cult to move, push
them up forcefully
one at a time.
M2
M2
–
Do not manually re-
turn the M2 release
levers to their original
positions. They will
return to their original
positions when the
fusing unit cover is closed.
C250P
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
–
8
When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do
not move them with your hand.
4
5
6
Pull out any misfed pa-
per.
Pull inside cover M3 to-
ward you to open it, and
then pull out any paper
caught in the fusing unit.
M3
Close the fusing unit
cover.
–
When closing the
fusing unit cover,
also return the M2 re-
lease levers to their
original positions.
C250P
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
7
Close the upper right-
side door.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and di-
als may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool
the skin under cold water, and then seek professional med-
ical attention.
Fusing unit
C250P
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical repre-
sentative.
The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit.
Reminder
Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt
or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface
of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller.
Image
transfer
belt
Image
transfer
roller
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a banner paper misfeed
8
1
Pull up the upper right-
side door release lever,
and then open the upper
right-side door.
–
If the end of the pa-
per cannot be seen
or cannot be
grabbed, pull out the
paper in the direction
of the arrow.
2
Open inside cover M1.
M1
C250P
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pull out any paper
8
3
caught in the timing roll-
er section.
Timing
roller
4
Push up the M2 release
levers. Since the M2 re-
lease levers may be diffi-
cult to move, push them
up forcefully one at a
time.
M2
–
Do not manually re-
turn the M2 release
levers to their original
positions. They will
return to their original
positions when the
fusing unit cover is
closed.
M2
–
When returning the M2 release levers to their original positions, do
not move them with your hand.
5
Push up the fusing unit
cover, and then pull out
any misfed paper.
C250P
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pull out any misfed pa-
8
6
7
8
per.
Pull inside cover M3 to-
ward you to open it, and
then pull out any paper
caught in the fusing unit.
M3
Close the fusing unit
cover.
–
When closing the
fusing unit cover,
also return the M2 re-
lease levers to their
original positions.
C250P
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
9
Close the upper right-
side door.
7 CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.
%Touching anything other than the indicated levers and di-
als may result in burns. If you get burnt, immediately cool
the skin under cold water, and then seek professional med-
ical attention.
Fusing unit
C250P
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Reminder
If the paper is misfed as described below, contact your technical repre-
sentative.
The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit.
The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit.
Reminder
Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt
or the image transfer roller is touched. Be careful not to touch the surface
of the image transfer belt or the image transfer roller.
Image
transfer
belt
Image
transfer
roller
C250P
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-501
8
1
2
3
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
Open the horizontal
transport unit cover, and
then remove any misfed
paper.
Close the horizontal
transport unit cover.
C250P
8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Open front door FN4.
8
4
FN4
5
Turn misfeed-clearing
dials FN5 clockwise at
the same time.
What should be done
?
FN5
if the paper can be
seen from the exit
tray?
% Turn misfeed-clear-
ing dials FN5 coun-
terclockwise at the
same time to feed
out any misfed pa-
per.
6
7
Close front door FN4.
While holding misfeed-
clearing guide FN7
open, pull out any mis-
fed paper.
FN7
C250P
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Open upper cover FN1.
8
8
9
Open misfeed-clearing
guide FN2, and then pull
out any misfed paper.
10 While holding misfeed-
clearing guide FN3
open, pull out any mis-
fed paper.
11 Close upper cover FN1.
C250P
8-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
12 If job separator is in-
stalled:
Open the job separator
cover.
–
If job separator is not
installed, skip to step
15.
13 Remove any misfed pa-
per.
14 Close the job separator cover.
15 While holding misfeed-
clearing guide FN6
open, pull out any mis-
fed paper.
16 Slide the finisher back against the machine.
C250P
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
7 CAUTION
Metallic parts on the inside of the upper cover are very hot.
%Touching any part other than the paper may result in
burns.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in Finisher FS-603
8
1
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
2
Open the horizontal
transport unit cover, and
then remove any misfed
paper.
3
4
Close the horizontal transport unit cover.
Open the front door of
the finisher.
C250P
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Turn misfeed-clearing
8
5
dial 1 clockwise until the
removal indicator is
completely blue.
Removal indicator
What should be done
?
if misfeed-clearing
dial 1 is turned too
far?
% Turn the misfeed-
clearing dial 1 coun-
terclockwise to finely
adjust it.
Misfeed-
clearing
dial 1
6
Open the upper door of
the finisher, and thenpull
out any paper in the feed
section.
C250P
8-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
7
8
Close the upper door.
Remove all paper fed
into the exit tray 1.
9
Open the misfeed-clear-
ing guide for the finisher,
and then remove any
misfed paper.
10 Open the right-side
door, and then pull out
any misfed paper in the
transport section.
C250P
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
11 If the paper could not be
removed in step 10, turn
the misfeed-clearing dial
in the folding section
clockwise.
Misfeed-
clearing dial in
the folding
section
Feed the paper into the
exit tray 2, and then pull
it out.
12 Close the front door of
the finisher.
13 Slide the finisher back against the machine.
If the message “Misfeed detected.” appears, be sure to open the front
door, turn the misfeed-clearing dial until the removal indicator is com-
pletely blue, and then remove the paper. If the paper is pulled out with too
much force, the finisher may be damaged.
Do not pull paper remaining in the transfer unit out with too much force,
otherwise the folding unit may be damaged.
Be careful that your fingers are not pinched when the front door is closed.
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
To clear a paper misfeed in the Finisher FS-514
8
1
Pull the finisher release
lever 1 to unlock the fin-
isher.
1
2
Grab the finisher at “2”,
and then slide the finish-
er away from the main
unit.
2
–
To move the finisher
away from the main
unit, be sure to grab
it at “2”. Do not grab
the mailbins or sad-
dle stitcher to move
the finisher, other-
wise they may be
damaged.
C250P
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Open the front door.
8
3
4
5
Raise lever FN1, turn dial
FN2, and then pull out
any paper.
FN1
FN2
Lower guide FN3, and
then pull out any paper.
FN3
C250P
8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
–
8
If the punch kit is in-
stalled, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container FN3.1.
FN3.1
6
7
Return guide FN3 to its original position.
If the punch kit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container
FN3.1 into its original position.
–
Turn dial FN4 to feed the
paper, open the trans-
port unit cover, and then
pull out any paper.
FN4
8
Turn dial FN5 or dial
FN6, and then pull out
any paper.
FN5
FN6
C250P
8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
9
Return the finisher to its original position.
–
When returning the
finisher to its original
position, do not grab
the handle on the
front door, the con-
trol panel, the mail-
bins, or the saddle
stitcher.
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pull handle FN8 to open
8
4
the misfeed-clearing
door.
FN8
5
Pull out any paper in the
mailbin.
6
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
Close the front door.
7
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
4
Open the misfeed-clear-
ing door, and then pull
out any paper.
5
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
Close the front door.
6
!
Detail
For details on the positions of paper misfeeds, refer to “Paper misfeed in-
dications” on page 8-5.
C250P
8-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.3
When the message “Replenish paper” appears
If a tray has run out of paper while printing, the message “Replenish paper.”
appears.
To replenish paper
%
ttttt: Indicates the code for the paper type
NRML (plain paper), 1SIDE (paper only for single-sided printing), OHP,
TH1 to TH3 (thick paper 1 to 3), CP (colored paper), LTHD (letterhead),
ENV (envelopes), and SP (special paper).
!
Detail
For details on loading paper into the paper trays, refer to “Loading paper
into the Tray 1” on page 5-10, “Loading paper into Tray 2, 3, or 4” on
page 5-15, “Loading paper into the LCT” on page 5-18, and “Loading pa-
per into the bypass tray” on page 5-21.
C250P
8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.4
Clearing a staple jam
Reminder
Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result.
If the staples become jammed, follow the procedure described below. If
the paper is pulled out with too much force, the stapler may be damaged.
To clear jammed staples in Finisher FS-501
1
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
2
Turn the jammed-staple-
clearing dial to the left in
order to position stapler
at the center.
C250P
8-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Pull the staple cartridge
8
3
Stapler
holder out toward you.
Staple
cartridge
holder
4
Swing open the shutter
of the staple cartridge
holder, and then pull out
one sheet of staples.
Sheet of
staples
Shutter
5
6
Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position.
Insert the staple car-
tridge holder until it locks
into place.
C250P
8-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Slide the finisher back against the machine.
8
7
Reminder
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above pro-
cedure, contact your technical representative.
To clear jammed staples in Finisher FS-603
1
2
3
Slide the finisher away
from the machine.
Open the horizontal
transport unit cover, and
then remove any misfed
paper.
Close the horizontal transport unit cover.
C250P
8-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Open the misfeed-clear-
8
4
ing guide for the finisher,
and then remove any
misfed paper.
5
Open the front door of
the finisher.
6
Turn misfeed-clearing
dial 1 clockwise until the
removal indicator is
completely blue.
Removal indicator
What should be done
?
if misfeed-clearing
dial 1 is turned too
far?
% Turn the misfeed-
clearing dial 1 coun-
terclockwise to finely
adjust it.
Misfeed-
clearing
dial 1
C250P
8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Remove all paper fed
8
7
8
9
into the exit tray 1.
Open the Right-side
door, and then pull out
any misfed paper in the
transport section.
Clockwise turn the mis-
feed-clearing dial in the
folding section. Feed out
into the exit tray 2 the
paper that could not be
fed out in step 8, and
then pull out the paper.
Misfeed-clearing
dial in the folding
section
C250P
8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
10 Slowly pull out the sta-
pler unit as far as possi-
ble.
11 Turn misfeed-clearing
dial 2 clockwise until the
cartridge removal indi-
cators are aligned.
The staple cartridge
moves to a position from
where it can be re-
moved.
Removal
position
Misfeed-clearing
dial 2
What should be done
?
if misfeed-clearing
dial 2 is turned too
far?
% Turn the misfeed-
clearing dial 2 counterclockwise to adjust it so the cartridge remov-
al indicators are aligned.
12 Grasp both sides of the
Staple cartridge
holder
staple cartridge holder,
lift it up, and then pull it
out.
C250P
8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
13 Swing open the shutter
of the staple cartridge.
14 Pull out toward you the
two staples jammed at
the end of the staple car-
tridge.
What happens if two
?
staples are not re-
moved?
% Stapling cannot con-
tinue correctly.
15 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge to its original position.
16 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, making
sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the
rails in the compartment.
C250P
8-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
17 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder until it locks
into place.
–
Check that the staple
cartridge holder is
securely installed.
18 Carefully move the sta-
pler unit back into its
original position.
19 Close the front door.
20 Slide the finisher back against the machine.
Reminder
Do not pull out paper with too much force, otherwise the folding unit may
be damaged.
C250P
8-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
4
Lower guide FN3, and
then pull out any paper.
FN3
–
If the punch kit is in-
stalled, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container FN3.1.
FN3.1
5
6
Return guide FN3 to its original position.
–
If the punch kit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container
FN3.1 into its original position.
Turn dial FN4 to feed the
paper, open the trans-
port unit cover, and then
pull out any paper.
FN4
C250P
8-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Turn dial FN5 or dial
8
7
FN6, and then pull out
any paper.
FN5
FN6
8
Turn the dial to the left to
move the stapler toward
the front.
C250P
8-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
9
Remove the staple car-
tridge holder.
–
Pull the staple car-
tridge holder toward
you to remove it.
Only touch the blue
parts of the staple
cartridge.
–
10 Swing open the shutter
of the staple cartridge
holder, and then pull out
one sheet of staples.
11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position.
C250P
8-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
12 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, making
sure the tabs on the
holder slide along the
rails in the compartment.
–
Check that the staple
cartridge holder is
securely installed.
13 Close the front door.
Reminder
If stapling still cannot be resumed, even after performing the above pro-
cedure, contact your technical representative.
C250P
8-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
–
8
If the punch kit is in-
stalled, pull out the
hole-punch waste
container FN3.1.
FN3.1
4
5
Return guide FN3 to its original position.
If the punch kit is installed, insert the hole-punch waste container
FN3.1 into its original position.
–
Turn dial FN4 to feed the
paper, open the trans-
port unit cover, and then
pull out any paper.
FN4
C250P
8-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Turn dial FN5 or dial
8
6
FN6, and then pull out
any paper.
FN5
FN6
7
Open the misfeed-clear-
ing door, and then pull
out any paper.
8
9
Close the misfeed-clearing door.
Raise the finishing tray,
and then push down the
staple cartridge holder
and remove it.
C250P
8-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
10 Swing open the shutter
of the staple cartridge
holder, and then pull out
one sheet of staples.
11 Return the shutter of the staple cartridge holder to its original position.
12 Insert the staple car-
tridge holder, and then
push it down until it
locks into place.
13 Return the finishing tray to its original position.
14 Close the front door.
C250P
8-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.5
When “near life limit” appears
When it is almost time to replace supplies or a part within this machine, the
message shown in the following illustration appears, warning about the re-
placement period.
Note
When the message appears, replace the specified supplies or part ac-
cording to your maintenance agreement.
!
Detail
After the message “xxxx near life limit” appears, the message
“Replace xxx” or “Please replace xxxx.” appears and the machine stops
operating.
C250P
8-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.6
Simple troubleshooting
Main unit
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The machine does not
start up when the main
power switch is turned
on.
electrical outlet?
plug into the electrical outlet.
The machine does not
start printing.
Is the right-side door of the
machine open?
Securely close the right-side door of
the machine.
es the document?
into the paper tray.
The printed output is too Was the print density
Check the printer driver setting.
light.
changed from the printer
driver?
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 5-10, p. 5-15, p. 5-18 and
p. 5-21.)
The printed output is too Was the print density
Check the printer driver setting.
dark.
changed from the printer
driver?
The printed output is
blurry.
Is the paper damp?
Replace the paper with new paper.
(See p. 5-10, p. 5-15, p. 5-18 and
p. 5-21.)
There are dark specks or Is the electrostatic charger
Use the charger-cleaning tool to
clean the electrostatic charger wire.
(See p. 7-4.)
spots throughout the
printed output.
wire dirty?
There are streaks in the
printed output.
The image is not aligned Are the lateral guides incor-
Slide the lateral guides against the
edges of the paper.
properly on the paper.
rectly positioned against the
edges of the paper?
Was curled paper loaded into Flatten the paper before loading it.
the paper tray?
The printed page is
curled.
Was paper that curls easily
(as with recycled paper)
used?
Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
Replace the paper with paper that is
not damp.
Even though the paper
misfeed was cleared,
prints cannot be pro-
duced.
Are there paper misfeeds at
other locations?
Check the control panel for other
paper misfeed indications, and then
remove any misfed paper at all other
locations. (See p. 8-5.)
Printing is not possible
even though the pass-
word is entered on a ma-
chine with user
Did the message “Exceeds
print limit.” appear?
Contact your administrator.
authentication/account
track set.
C250P
8-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Finisher
8
Symptom
Possible Cause
Remedy
The finisher cannot be
used.
Is no power supplied to the
connector?
Check that the cord is correctly in-
serted into the connector.
The pages cannot be
stapled.
Have the staples run out?
Replace the staple cartridge. (See
p. 6-9.)
The pages that were fed Is the paper curled?
out were not uniformly
loaded and the punched
Remove the paper from the paper
tray, turn it over, and then load it
again.
holes or staples are in-
correctly positioned.
Is there a gap between the
lateral guides in the paper
tray and the side of the pa-
per?
Slide the lateral guides in the paper
tray against the side of the paper so
that there is no gap.
Even though a Punch
setting was selected,
holes are not punched.
(when Punch Kit is in-
stalled on Finisher)
Did the message “Punch
Scrap Full.” appear?
Empty the hole-punch waste con-
tainer.
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation
described in the message.
If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed,
contact your technical representative.
C250P
8-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Printer driver
8
Symptom
Probable Cause
Action
Check the printer name selected.
The message “No
printers are connect-
ed.” or “Print error”
appears.
The printer driver selected for
printing is not compatible with the
printer controller.
The network cable, parallel cable, Check that the cable is connected
or USB cable is disconnected.
properly.
Available memory space is not
sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
An error has occurred in this ma- Check this machine’s control
chine.
panel.
A postscript error ap-
pears.
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
There is an error in the application Refer to the user’s manual of the
software settings.
application software to check the
settings.
The file printing settings are incor- Change the settings and try to
rect.
print again.
The machine does not The printer driver selected for
start printing although printing is not compatible with the
the print job was com- printer controller.
pleted on the compu-
Check the printer name selected.
The network cable, parallel cable, Check that the cable is connected
or USB cable is disconnected. properly.
ter.
An error has occurred in this ma- Check this machine’s control
chine.
panel.
A print job is queued in this ma-
chine, delaying printing.
Check the job order on the Active
Jobs list of the machine’s control
panel.
“Save in User Box” was selected Check if the print job is stored on
for the print job.
the Box screen of this machine’s
control panel.
“Secure Print” was selected for
the print job.
Check if the print job is held on the
Secure Print User Box screen of
this machine’s control panel.
If the account track settings have Enter the correct account name
been applied, an unregistered ac- (or password).
count name (or password) may
have been entered.
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check
whether printing is possible.
The connection of this machine to Consult with the network adminis-
the network is not yet established trator.
(while connecting to a network).
C250P
8-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Symptom
Probable Cause
Action
A printer driver setting Some functions cannot be com-
Do not try to select settings that
are not available.
cannot be selected.
bined.
The “Conflicts” mes-
sage with “Unable to
Select” or “Function
Canceled” appears.
An incorrect combination of func- Check the settings and specify
tions has been specified.
the functions correctly.
Printing is not per-
formed as specified.
Incorrect settings are specified.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
A combination of functions, al-
though possible in the printer driv-
er, is not possible with this
machine.
The paper size, orientation, and
Enter the correct settings in the
other settings specified in the ap- application.
plication have priority over those
specified in the printer driver.
The watermark cannot The watermark is not correctly
Check the watermark settings.
be printed.
set.
The watermark density is set to a Check the density settings.
level that is too low.
Watermarks cannot be printed in
graphics applications.
No watermark can be printed in
this case.
The staple function
cannot be specified.
Stapling is not possible if “Paper
Type” is set to “Thick” or “Trans- driver.
parency”.
Check each setting in the printer
For stapling, an optional finisher
must be installed.
Install the required optional finish-
er and enable it using the printer
driver.
Stapling cannot be
performed.
Stapling is not possible if the doc- Check the document.
ument contains pages of different
sizes.
The stapling position
is not as expected.
The orientation setting is not cor- Check the stapling position in the
rect.
printer driver setup dialog box.
The hole punch func-
tion cannot be speci-
fied.
Hole punching cannot be speci-
Check each setting in the printer
fied if “Booklet” is selected or pa- driver.
per not compatible with the
finisher is used.
The punch kit must be installed on Install the required optional finish-
optional finisher FS-514 or FS-
603.
er and enable it using the printer
driver.
The pages are not
punched.
Printed pages may be fed out
without being punched if the pa-
per is loaded into the paper
source with an incorrect orienta-
tion.
Check the orientation setting.
The hole punch posi-
tion is not as expect-
ed.
The orientation setting is not cor- Check the punch position on the
rect.
Layout tab of the printer driver
setup dialog box.
C250P
8-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Symptom
Probable Cause
Action
The form is not printed Available computer memory
properly. space is not sufficient.
Simplify the form to reduce the
data size.
The image is not print- Available computer memory
Simplify the image to reduce the
data size.
ed properly.
space is not sufficient.
Paper is not fed from
the specified paper
source.
Paper will not be fed from the
specified paper source if that pa- of the appropriate size and orien-
per source is loaded with paper of tation.
Load the paper source with paper
a different size or orientation.
The access number
cannot be specified.
To specify access numbers, a
HDD must be added in the Option the printer driver.
tab of the printer driver.
Add a HDD in the Option tab of
C250P
8-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
8.7
Main messages and their remedies
Main messages
Message
Cause
Remedy
*1
Set paper.
Paper of a suitable size is not Either select a different size or feed
*1
Check Size
loaded in a paper tray.
paper of a suitable size from the by-
pass tray.
*1
Check Type
Remove paper.
Account Name
Since the maximum amount
of papers for the indicated
finisher exit tray has been ex-
ceeded, the machine is una-
ble to make prints.
Remove all papers from the indicat-
ed tray.
Account track settings have
been specified. Prints cannot password. (See p. 3-21, p. 3-52,
Type in your account name and
be made unless an account
name and its correct pass-
word are entered.
and p. 3-100.)
Exceeds print limit.
Door open at xxxxxx
The limit on the number of
prints that can be made has
been reached.
Contact your administrator.
installed correctly, the ma-
chine is unable to make
prints.
installed correctly.
Please set IU.
The fusing unit is not installed Reinstall the supplies or parts, or
correctly.
contact your technical representa-
tive.
Toner Cartridge not set.
The indicated toner cartridge
is not installed correctly.
Waste Toner Box not
set.
The waste-toner box is not in-
stalled correctly.
1
Replenish paper.*
The indicated tray has run out Load paper into the indicated tray.
of paper.
(See p. 5-10, p. 5-15, p. 5-18, and
p. 5-21.)
Toner near empty.
Toner Empty
The toner for the indicated
color is about to run out.
Prepare to replace the toner car-
tridge according to your mainte-
nance agreement.
Since the toner for the indi-
cated color has run out, the
machine is unable to make
prints.
Replace the toner cartridge accord-
ing to your maintenance agreement.
Add Staple.
The staples have run out.
Replace the staple cartridge.
(See p. 6-9.)
Paper Misfeed at xxxx
Since a paper misfeed oc-
curred, the machine is unable (See p. 8-5.)
to make prints.
Clear the paper misfeed.
HDD Password Error
Encryption Key failure
The password is incorrect.
Register the correct password.
The encryption key is incor-
rect.
Register the correct encryption key,
or format the HDD.
C250P
8-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
8
Message
Cause
Remedy
Trouble C-xxxx Call
Service
The machine malfunctioned
and is unable to make prints. of the code displayed on the control
panel.
Inform your technical representative
If any message other than those listed above appears, perform the operation
described in the message.
*1 For a message concerning the paper, the paper tray, paper size and paper
type are indicated as codes in the second line.
Example: T1: A4-R NRML
(For A4-R-sized plain paper in Tray 1)
The codes represent the following.
-
Trays
T1 to T4 (Tray 1 to Tray 4), BP (bypass tray), LC (LCT)
-
Paper size
AO, AO-R, BO, BOx-R (“O” is replaced with a number that indicates the
paper size.)
LD (11 × 17), LG (Legal), LT (Letter), IV (Invoice), EX (7-1/4 × 10-1/2)
8K, 16K, 16K-R
OOW or OOWR (wide paper for each size), FR (custom size)
Paper type
-
NRML (plain paper), 1SIDE (paper only for single-sided printing), OHP,
TH1 to TH3 (thick paper 1 to 3)
CP (colored paper), LTHD (letterhead), ENV (envelopes), and SP (special
paper)
C250P
8-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 Additional settings
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
9
Additional settings
9.1
PageScope Web Connection is a device management utility supported by
the HTTP server integrated into the printer.
Using a Web browser on a computer connected to the network, machine set-
tings can be specified from PageScope Web Connection.
!
Detail
Flash and HTML are available from View Mode in PageScope Web Con-
nection. For details, refer to “Logging In to the Administrator Mode” on
page 9-6.
System Requirements
Item
System Requirements
Network
EthernetTCP/IP
Computer application Web Browser:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later recommended (JavaScript ena-
bled, Cookies enabled)
Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X must be installed when using Internet
Explorer 5.5.
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled, Cookies enabled)
®
®
Macromedia Flash (If “Flash” is selected in View Mode, version 7.0
or later plugin is required.)
Accessing PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Web Connection can be accessed directly from a Web browser.
1
2
In the Address bar, enter the IP address for this machine, and then
press the [Enter] key.
http://<IP_address_for_this_machine>/
Example: If the IP address for this machine is 192.168.1.20
http://192.168.1.20/
!
Detail
For the procedure to set the IP address of this machine, refer to “Speci-
fying the TCP/IP settings” on page 2-37.
C250P
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Page Structure
9
The page that appears immediately after PageScope Web Connection is ac-
cessed is called the User mode page, and it is displayed when you have
logged in as a public user.
Note
If no operation is performed for the set length of time while logged on, a
timeout occurs and you will automatically be logged off. Specify the time-
out period by clicking “Auto Logout” in the “Authentication” submenu on
the Network tab of Administrator mode.
The configuration of the PageScope Web Connection page is shown below.
5
6
7
8
1
2
9
10
3
4
11
12
No.
Item
KONICA MINOLTA Logo
Description
1
Click the logo to jump to the following Web site (KONICA
MINOLTA Web site). http://konicaminolta.com
C250P
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
No.
Item
Description
2
PageScope Web
Connection Logo
Click the PageScope Web Connection logo to display the
version information of PageScope Web Connection.
3
4
5
Login mode
[Logout]
Displays the current login mode.
Click to log out of the current mode.
Status Display
Displays the status of this machine’s printer sections using
icons.
6
Message Display
Displays the status of the problem/error and other error
information if an error has occurred in this machine.
7
8
Operation page
Tab
Displays the operating status of this machine.
Displays the categories that can be controlled by
PageScope Web Connection. The following tabs are
displayed in User mode.
•
•
•
•
System
Job
Box
Print
9
Help
The page specified in “Online Manual URL” is displayed.
For the setting procedure, refer to “System tab” on
page 9-12.
10
11
Refresh
Menus
Click to renew the page that is being displayed.
Lists the information and settings for the selected tab. The
menus that appear vary depending on the tab that is
selected.
12
Information and Settings
Display
Displays the details of the item selected from the menu.
C250P
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Cache Function of Web Browsers
9
The newest information may not appear on the PageScope Web Connection
page due to the cache function of the Web browser. In addition, problems
can occur when the cache function is used.
When using PageScope Web Connection, disable the cache function of the
Web browser.
!
Detail
The menus and commands may vary depending on the Web browser. For
details, refer to Help for the Web browser.
If the cache function is enabled on the Web browser and a timeout occurs
in Administrator mode, the timeout page may appear even when Page-
Scope Web Connection is accessed again. When this happens, the ma-
chine’s control panel remains locked, and the main power of this machine
must be turned off, then on again. To avoid such problems, disable the
cache function.
When turning the power off, then on again, be sure to turn the sub-power
switch off first, then the main power switch. In addition, wait at least 10
seconds before turning the power on again; otherwise, this machine may
not function properly.
On Internet Explorer
1
2
On the “Tools” menu, click “Internet Options”.
On the General tab, click the [Settings] button under “Temporary Inter-
net files”.
3
Select “Every visit to the page”, and then click the [OK] button.
On Netscape Navigator
1
2
3
On the “Edit” menu, click “Preferences”.
In the “Category” box, click “Advanced”, then “Cache”.
Under “Compare the page in the cache to the page on the network”,
select “Every time I view the page”.
C250P
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Logging In to the Administrator Mode
9
You can specify the system and network settings by logging in to the Admin-
istrator mode.
1
In the login page, select [Administrator], and then click the [Login] but-
ton.
–
If necessary, select the language and the display format.
2
Enter the administrator password for this machine, and then click the
[OK] button.
C250P
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
The page switches to the Administrator mode page.
9
Note
If the User mode page is displayed, click the [Logout] button to display
the login page.
When logged in to the Administrator mode, the machine’s control panel
is locked and cannot be used.
Depending on the status of this machine, you may not be able to log in
to the Administrator mode.
If “Flash” is selected in the display format, the following items are dis-
played by using the Flash function.
• Status icons and images
• “System tab – Device Information – Input Tray” status
• “System tab” status
To use the “Flash” function, Flash Player is required.
If using screen reader software, it is recommended to select HTML.
C250P
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
User mode
The User mode provides functions for checking and operating the machine
on a user level. You can select from four tabs (System, Job, Box, and Print)
System tab
On the System tab, information and settings concerning the system config-
uration of this machine are displayed.
The System tab is the first page that appears when you access “http://
<IP_address_for_this_machine>/” on the Web browser.
C250P
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Menus
Description
Device In-
formation
Consumables
Information about consumables for this machine is dis-
played.
Input Tray
The status of each paper tray is displayed.
Output Tray
The status of each of installed output tray is displayed.
Configuration
Summary
A summary of the system configuration for the machine
and its status is displayed.
HDD
The capacity and size used for the machine’s HDD are dis-
played.
Interface Informa-
tion
The usability of each protocol and network information are
displayed.
Administrator Infor- Information about the administrator for this machine is dis-
mation
played.
Meter Count
The counters managed by the machine are displayed.
Support information for the machine is displayed.
Online Assistance
Account Track Information
The account information for the users that are logged on is
displayed.
Note
If the consumables are not installed, their status may not be correctly in-
dicated on the page displayed by clicking “Consumables” in the menu
under “Device Information”.
The information that appears in the Device Information page differs de-
pending on the options that are installed.
If account track settings have not been specified from the machine, “Ac-
count Track Information” does not appear.
Job tab
From the Job tab, jobs managed by the machine can be checked.
Menus
Description
Current
Jobs
Print
The list of print jobs being performed and queued to be per-
formed and their details are displayed.
HDD/Memory
The list of box jobs being performed and queued to be per-
formed and their details are displayed.
Job History Print
HDD/Memory
The list of completed print jobs and their details are dis-
played.
The list of completed box jobs and their details are dis-
played.
C250P
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Note
The number assigned to the job when it was queued in the machine ap-
pears as the job number.
Box tab
From the Box tab, you can create boxes and check and download files from
boxes.
Menus
Description
Open User Box
Create User Box
Type in the box number and password for the box to be opened.
Create a new box. Specify the necessary information for the type of
box to be created.
Note
Some operations cannot be performed while a box or file is being ac-
cessed from a different print of PageScope Web Connection or from the
control panel.
The Box tab appears only if the optional HDD is installed.
!
Detail
For details on creating boxes, refer to “Box operations” on page 9-16.
Print tab
From the Print tab, you can check the default printer settings and print the
various reports.
Menus
Description
Default
Setting
General Setting
PCL Setting
The default printer settings are displayed.
The PCL settings are displayed.
PS Setting
The PostScript settings are displayed.
The list of fonts that can be used with PostScript are printed.
The list of fonts that can be used with PCL are printed.
The demo page is printed.
Print
Reports
PS Font List
PCL Font List
GDI Demo Page
Configuration Page A list of the machine settings is printed.
Paper Tray Select the paper tray loaded with the paper used for printing
the reports.
C250P
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Note
It may not be possible to print reports while the machine is processing a
job.
Administrator mode
In Administrator mode, you can specify system settings for this machine.
You can select from five tabs (System, Job, Box, Print, and Network).
For details on logging on to Administrator mode, refer to “Logging In to the
Administrator Mode” on page 9-6.
Basic operation
1
2
Click a tab, and then select an item from the menu on the left side.
Specify settings for the displayed options. Either type in a setting di-
rectly or select one from the drop-down list.
3
Click the [Apply] button to apply the settings.
C250P
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
System tab
On the System tab, information and settings concerning the system config-
uration of this machine are displayed.
Menus
Description
Import/Export
Information from this machine can be saved as a file (ex-
ported) or information can be written to this machine (im-
ported).
Date/Time
Manual Setting
Type in the date and time to specify them.
Time Adjustment
Setting
Specify whether the date and time can be set by acquiring
them from the NTP server.
Machine Setting
Specify the device name, location and the name of the ad-
ministrator.
Device In-
formation
Consumables
Information about consumables for this machine is dis-
played.
Input Tray
The status of each paper tray is displayed.
Output Tray
The status of each of installed output tray is displayed.
Configuration
Summary
A summary of the system configuration for the machine
and its status is displayed.
HDD
The capacity and size used for the machine’s HDD are dis-
played.
Interface Informa-
tion
The usability of each protocol and network information are
displayed.
Administrator Infor- Information about the administrator for this machine is dis-
mation
played.
ROM Version
Meter Count
The ROM version is displayed.
The counters managed by the machine are displayed.
Online Assistance
Specify the support information for this machine. To dis-
play this information, click the System tab in User mode,
and then click “Online Assistance”.
Mainte-
nance
Network Setting
Clear
The machine’s network settings can be reset to those
specified when the machine was shipped from the factory.
Reset
The printer can be reset.
Format All Destina- This item is not available with this machine.
tion
Status Notification Setting
This item is not available with this machine.
Total Counter Report Setting (De- This item is not available with this machine.
vice Nickname)
Network TWAIN
This item is not available with this machine.
C250P
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Note
Only text files can be read when importing and exporting.
If the settings are cleared by selecting “Network Setting Clear”, you will
not be able to connect to this machine until the settings are specified
again.
Job tab
From the Job tab, the history of jobs managed by the machine can be
checked.
Menus
Description
Job History Print
The list of completed print jobs and their details are dis-
played.
HDD/Memory
The list of completed box jobs and their details are dis-
played.
Note
The number assigned to the job when it was queued in the machine ap-
pears as the job number.
Box tab
On the Box tab, information and settings for the boxes are displayed.
Menus
Description
Open User Box
Create User Box
Type in the box number for the box to be opened.
Create a new box. Specify the necessary information for
the type of box to be created.
Note
Some operations cannot be performed while a box or file is being ac-
cessed from a different print of PageScope Web Connection or from the
control panel.
The box administrator can monitor documents in public boxes without a
password.
The Box tab appears only if the optional HDD is installed.
C250P
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Print tab
From the Print tab, the default print settings can be changed.
Menus
Description
Interface
Specify the amount of time until the interface times out.
Default Set- General Setting
ting
Change the default print settings, such as the paper tray
and paper size.
PCL Setting
PS Setting
Change the PCL settings.
Change the PostScript settings.
Network tab
From the Network tab, settings concerning the network connection can be
changed.
Menus
Description
TCP/IP Set- TCP/IP Setting
ting
Change the TCP/IP settings, such as the IP address for the
connection.
IP Filtering Setting
Specify the settings for IP address filtering.
Limitations can be set on access by specifying the IP ad-
dress of the host.
NetWare
Setting
NetWare Setting
NetWare Status
Change the NetWare settings.
The NetWare file server and print queue name are dis-
played to show the NetWare connection status.
IPP Setting
Change the settings for IPP printing.
This item is not available with this machine.
This item is not available with this machine.
Change the SNMP settings.
FTP Setting TX
Server
SNMP Setting
SMB Set-
ting
WINS Setting
Client Setting
Print Setting
Change the WINS settings.
This item is not available with this machine.
Change the settings for SMB printing.
Change the AppleTalk settings.
AppleTalk Setting
Bonjour Setting
Change the Bonjour settings.
LDAP Set-
ting
LDAP Setting
This item is not available with this machine.
This item is not available with this machine.
LDAP Sever
Registration
E-Mail Set- E-mail RX (POP)
This item is not available with this machine.
This item is not available with this machine.
This item is not available with this machine.
This item is not available with this machine.
ting
E-mail TX (SMTP)
Network
Fax Setting
SMTP TX Setting
SMTP RX Setting
C250P
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Menus
Description
SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS
Specify the settings for SSL/TLS. When SSL is used, trans-
missions between this machine and the client computer are
encrypted.
In order use SSL, a self-signed certificate must first be cre-
ated or a certificate issued by a certification authority must
be installed. The certificate is obtained from the certifica-
tion authority by sending data requesting that a certificate
be issued.
Processing Method Select what operation is performed if the period of validity
for the SSL sever certificate has expired when this machine
is connecting to an SSL server as a client.
Authentica- Auto Logout
tion
Specify the settings for automatically logging out from Ad-
ministrator mode and User mode. If no operation is per-
formed within the length of time set here, the user is
automatically logged out from the mode.
OpenAPI Setting
Specify the port number for the extended application inter-
face. Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used with this ma-
chine.
TCP Socket Setting
Specify the TCP socket settings. TCP socket is used during
data transmissions between the computer application and
this machine.
Select whether or not SSL/TLS is used with this machine.
Note
“Use SSL/TLS” does not appear for “OpenAPI Setting” or “TCP Socket
Setting” if the settings for using SSL are not first specified for “SSL/TLS”.
If “TCP Socket” is set to “OFF”, applications on multiple computers may
no longer be used.
In order to apply the changes to the settings on the Network tab, restart
the machine (turn it off, then on again).
Reminder
When the machine is turned off, then on again, wait at least 10 seconds
to turn the machine on after turning it off. The machine may not operate
correctly if it is turned on immediately after being turned off.
C250P
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
9.2
Box operations
Box operations allow document print data to be saved on the HDD and print-
ed when desired. Various boxes can be created for specific uses, and data
can be saved in a specified box.
Available parameters
User mode
Menu
Description
Open User Box
Create User Box
Type in the box number and password for the box to be opened.
Create a new box. Specify the necessary information for the type of
box to be created.
Administrator mode
Menu
Description
Open User Box
Create User Box
Type in the box number for the box to be opened.
Create a new box. Specify the necessary information for the type of
box to be created.
Opening Boxes
The list of boxes currently created and the list of data saved in those boxes
can be viewed.
C250P
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Open Public User Box
9
Item
Description
User Box No.
User Box Password
Type in the number of the box to be opened.
Type in the password if a password has been set for
the box.
Public User Box List
Item
Description
Page (Display by 50 cases)
If there are more than 50 boxes, specify the page to be
displayed.
Search from Index
Box list
Displays the list of boxes according the index search
characters selected when the box was created.
Displays the box number, box name and date/time
that the box was created. appears beside boxes
that have a password specified.
Note
When logged on to Administrator mode, the settings of boxes can be
specified or the boxes can be deleted without the box password being
entered.
C250P
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
To open a box
9
1
Select the box type, and then click [Next].
2
3
4
In the “User Box No.” box, type the box number.
For User mode, type the password in the “User Box Password” box.
Click [OK].
A list of the documents saved in the specified box is displayed.
C250P
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Checking Box Information
9
The basic box information and the list of documents saved in the box can be
viewed. In addition, documents can be deleted, renamed or moved/copied.
Box Detail Information
Item
Description
Refresh to the new information
User Box No.
Click
to display the most recent information.
Displays the number of the box.
Displays the name of the box.
Displays the search characters for the box.
User Box Name
Index
Documentation Auto Delete Time
Displays the length of time until documents are delet-
ed from the box.
[User Box Setting] button
[Delete User Box] button
Click this button to specify basic box settings.
Click this button to delete the box.
C250P
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Document List
9
Item
Description
Document Name
Time Stored
Displays the name of the document.
Displays the date/time that the document was regis-
tered.
Click this icon to display detailed information for the
document.
This item is not available with this machine.
Click this icon to delete the document.
Click this icon to change the name of the document.
Click this icon to move/copy the document to a differ-
ent box.
Changing the Box Settings
To change the box settings, click [User Box Setting] in the Box Detail Infor-
mation page.
C250P
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
When changing the box attributes, specify information for the following, and
then click [Apply].
Item
Description
User Box No.
User Box Name
Index
Displays the box number. This cannot be changed.
Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters.
Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the
box to the “Main” group, select the check box.
Documentation Auto Delete Time
User Box Password is changed.
Current Password
Select the length of time that a document is stored in
the box.
Select this check box to change the setting for confi-
dential reception.
Type in the current password of a maximum of 8 al-
phanumeric characters.
New Password
Type in the new password. Enter 8 or less numbers.
The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“) cannot be
used.
Retype New Password
Type in the new password again for confirmation.
When logged on to Administrator mode, settings can be specified without
the password being entered into the “Current Password” box.
C250P
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
Item
Description
User Box No.
Type in a box number between 1 and 999,999,999. Up
to 1,000 boxes can be created.
User Box Name
Type in a box name of a maximum of 20 characters.
User Box Password
Type in a password of a maximum of 8 alphanumeric
characters. The plus sign (+) and quotation mark (“)
cannot be used.
If the password rules have been enabled on the ma-
chine, specify a password that contains 8 digits.
Retype User Box Password
Type in the password again for confirmation.
Index
Type in the characters used for indexing. To add the
box to the “Main” group, select the check box.
User Box Type
Displays the box type.
Documentation Auto Delete Time
Select the length of time that a document is stored in
the box.
C250P
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
9.3
Managing print jobs
Specifying job operations
Job operations can be specified for this machine by specifying settings in the
printer driver.
Available job operations
Menus
Description
Secure Print
Type in an ID and password from the machine’s control
panel in order to print the document. (Up to 100 documents
can be saved in this way.)
If the password rules have been enabled on the machine,
specify a password that contains 8 digits.
Save in User Box
The print document is saved in a box on the machine.
Save in User Box and Print
The document is printed at the same time that it is saved in
a box.
Proof and Print
After printing a single copy of the document, the machine
temporarily stops. Select this function in order to prevent
misprints from occurring in large-volume print jobs.
Note
The secured printing and box functions are only available when a HDD is
installed.
Reminder
Settings for these functions can be specified from the following printer
drivers.
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server
2003
Konica Minolta PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
C250P
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Setting procedure
9
With Windows, select a function from the “Output Method” drop-down list
on the Setup tab.
C250P
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
With a Macintosh, select a function from the “Output Method” drop-down
9
list, which is displayed after “Security” is selected.
C250P
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Storing jobs
9
Depending on the function selected in the “Output Method” drop-down list
of the printer driver, the print document may be stored on this machine as a
print job.
In order to print a stored job, the job must be recalled using the “Job Oper-
ation” menu from the machine’s control panel.
Recalling a job
1
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The settings menu ap-
pears.
Menu
Select
2
3
“Job Operation” appears.
Press the [→] key.
–
If account track settings have been specified on the machine, the
screen for entering the account name appears. Continue with step
4 to enter the account name and password.
–
If account track settings have not been specified, the “Job Opera-
tion” menu appears. Skip to step 6 to select the job.
C250P
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
4
5
6
Enter the account name, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
Enter the account name by pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys until the de-
sired character appears and pressing the [→] key so that the next char-
acter can be entered.
When the [Menu/Select] key is pressed, the screen for entering the
password appears.
Enter the password, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
Enter the password by pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired
character appears and pressing the [→] key so that the next character
can be entered.
When the [Menu/Select] key is pressed, the “Job Operation” menu ap-
pears.
Press the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired job appears.
–
Secure Print: Select to print a document stored using the “Secure
Print” function.
–
User Box: Select to print a document stored using the “Save in User
Box” or “Save in User Box and Print” function.
C250P
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
–
9
Held Jobs: Select to print a document stored using the “Proof and
Print” function or any other stored job.
7
8
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
–
If “Secure Print” or “User Box” was selected, the screen for entering
the ID and box number appears. Continue with step 8 to enter the
appropriate information.
–
If “Held Jobs” was selected, a screen for selecting the print range
appears. Skip to step 10 to select the print range.
Enter the ID if “Secure Print” was selected or the box number if “User
Box” was selected, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
Enter the data by pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired charac-
ter appears and pressing the [→] key so that the next character can be
entered.
When the [Menu/Select] key is pressed, the screen for entering the
password appears.
9
Enter the password, and then press the [Menu/Select] key.
Enter the password by pressing the [↑] and [↓] keys until the desired
character appears and pressing the [→] key so that the next character
can be entered.
When the [Menu/Select] key is pressed, the screen for selecting the
print range appears.
10 To print, press the [Menu/Select] key.
The print confirmation screen appears.
–
To specify the number of copies to be printed, press the [→] key,
and then specify the desired number of copies in the screen that
appears. If “ALL” was selected, the number of copies cannot be
specified.
C250P
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
–
9
To delete the job, press the [Cancel] key.
11 Press the [Menu/Select] key.
The document is printed.
C250P
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Printing when account track settings have been specified
9
If account track settings have been specified, the account code (access
code) must be entered in order to print.
Reminder
If the entered access code is not registered with the account track set-
tings of the machine or if account track settings have not been specified,
an error will occur. Use the “Job Operation” menu from the machine’s
control panel to check the job.
These settings can be specified from the following printer drivers.
Konica Minolta PCL Printer Driver for Windows
Konica Minolta PostScript Printer Driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server
2003
Konica Minolta PPD Printer Driver for Mac OS X
Note
If the optional HDD is not installed, 100 accounts can be specified. If the
optional HDD is installed, 1000 accounts can be managed.
Setting procedure (for Windows)
1
Click the [Properties] or [Preferences] button in the Print dialog box to
display the Printing Preferences dialog box.
2
3
Click the Setup tab.
Click the [User Authentication/Account Track] button.
C250P
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
4
Select the “Account Track” check box, and then type in the department
name and password.
5
After specifying the settings, click the [OK] button to print the docu-
ment.
–
If the entered department name and password are accepted by the
machine, the job is printed and added to the count for the specified
account.
C250P
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Setting procedure (for Mac OS X)
9
1
2
3
On the “File” menu, click “Print”.
Select “Security”.
Select the “Account Track” check box, and then type in the department
name and password.
4
–
If the entered department name and password are accepted by the
machine, the job is printed and added to the count for the specified
account.
Job operations in PageScope Web Connection
From PageScope Web Connection, the status of jobs being performed by
this machine can be checked.
For details, refer to the following pages.
“Job tab” on page 9-9, page 9-13
C250P
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
9.4
Printing on Banner Paper
Paper up to 47-1/4 inch long can be loaded into the bypass tray and printed
on using this machine with the appropriate setting specified from the control
panel.
Loading banner paper and printing on it is referred to as “banner printing”
throughout the manual.
Paper
Paper types
Paper Width
Paper Length
Paper Type
8-1/4 to 11-3/4 inch
18 to 47-1/4 inch
33-3/4 to 42-1/2 lb
Note
Feed only one sheet of paper at a time.
Printer Drivers and Supported Operating Systems
The following drivers are compatible with banner paper printing.
PageDescription Printer Driver
Language
Supported Operating Systems
PCL (PCL XL)
Konica Minolta Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows
PCL Driver
XP Home Edition, Windows XP Professional, Windows
Server 2003
PostScript 3 Emu- Konica Minolta Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows
lation
PostScript
Driver
XP Home Edition, Windows XP Professional, and Win-
dows Server 2003
Specifying Printer Driver Settings
The paper sizes to be printed are preregistered as Custom Size.
To specify printer driver settings
1
2
Click the Setup tab.
From the “Original Size” or “Output Size” drop-down lists, select “Cus-
tom Size Settings”.
The Custom Size Settings dialog box appears.
C250P
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
3
Specify settings for the following:
–
–
–
List of Custom Sizes: Select the size for the custom size being set.
(Konica Minolta PCL driver only)
Custom Size Name: Input the name of the custom size being regis-
tered. (Konica Minolta PCL driver only)
Size: Specify the width and length of the custom size according to
the selected measurement units.
4
5
Click the [OK] button.
When printing, select the Custom Size that was registered from the
“Original Size” and “Output Size” drop-down lists on the Setup tab.
Note
For the Konica Minolta PCL driver, the custom size settings can only be
specified from the printer driver setup dialog box, which can be displayed
from the Printers window (for Windows XP/Server 2003,Printers and Fax-
es window).
Printing
To print
1
2
Press the [Menu/Select] key in the control panel.
Press the [↓] key until “Banner Print OFF” is displayed.
3
Press the [Menu/Select] key.
C250P
9-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
4
Press the [↑] or [↓] key to select “ON”, and then press the [Menu/Select]
key.
5
If the following message appears in the control panel, reposition the
finisher.
–
If the finisher is not installed, continue with step 7.
C250P
9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
Place the paper to be printed on over the finisher and output tray.
9
6
7
From the computer, select the job to be printed, and then click “Print”
on the “File” menu.
8
9
Specify the desired settings, and then click the [OK] button.
Open the bypass tray.
10 With the side to be printed on facing down, insert the paper as much
as possible into the feed slot.
–
Before loading the paper, check that the following message ap-
pears in the control panel.
C250P
9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
11 Slide the lateral guides to fit the size of paper being loaded.
–
–
Load only one sheet of paper at a time.
Print while supporting the loaded paper with your hands.
C250P
9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional settings
9
12 Press the [Menu/Select] key.
Printing begins.
–
–
The end of the printed paper will be fed into the top of the finisher.
To continue printing, repeat steps 10 through 12.
13 When printing is finished, press the [Cancel] key.
14 Press the [Menu/Select] key.
If the finisher is installed, return it to its original position.
–
C250P
9-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 Appendix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
10 Appendix
10.1 Specifications
bizhub C250P
Specifications
Type
Freestanding printer
OPC
Photoconductor
Developing system
Fusing system
Paper
HMT developing method (HMT-OR)
Roller fixing
Plain paper (17 to 24 lb), thick paper 1 (24-1/4 to 40 lb)*, thick
paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)*, thick paper 3 (55-3/4 to 68 lb)*
overhead projector transparencies*,
letterheads, colored paper, envelopes*, label sheets*,
banner paper (33-3/4 lb to 42-1/2 lb)**
* Can only be fed through the Tray 1 or the bypass tray
** Can only be fed through the bypass tray
Print sizes
Tray 1:
11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w(A3 Wide),
A3 wto B6 w, A6 w, 8 × 13 w
*1
Width: 3-1/2 to 12-1/4; Length: 5-1/2 to 18
Tray 2:
A3 wto B5 w/v, 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
Bypass tray:
11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18 w(A3 Wide),
*1
Banner paper, A3 wto B6 w, A6 w, 8 × 13 w
Width: 3-1/2 to 12-1/4; Length: 5-1/2 to 18
Banner paper — Width: 8-1/4 to 11-3/4; Length: 18 to 47-1/4
Paper tray capacity
Tray 1:
Plain paper: 250 sheets
Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies,
label sheets, envelopes: 20 sheets or less
Tray 2:
Plain paper: 500 sheets
Bypass tray:
Plain paper: 100 sheets
Thick paper 1/2/3, overhead projector transparencies,
label sheets envelopes: 10 sheets or less, banner paper: 1
sheet
Print exit tray capacity
Plain paper: 350 sheets; Thick paper: 20 sheets; Overhead
projector transparencies: 1 sheet
Warm-up time
Less than 110 seconds (at room temperature (73.4°F))
Image loss width
Leading edge: 3/16; Trailing edge: 3/16; Rear edge: 3/16;
Front edge: 3/16
RAM
512 MB
40 GB
Hard Disk (Option)
C250P
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Interface
Standard: Ethernet (10Base-T or 100Base-TX)
Optional: USB 1.1, USB 2.0, or IEEE 1284
Frame Type
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Supported Protocols
Print Speed
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetBEUI
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
25 pages/minute (color/monochrome, 8-1/2 × 11 vpaper,
and simplex) 23 pages/minute (color/monochrome, 8-1/2 ×
11 vpaper, and duplex)
First Print Time
11.7 seconds or less (color and 8-1/2 × 11 paper)
8.4 seconds or less (monochrome and 8-1/2 × 11 paper)
Printer Language
PCL5e/c Emulation
PCL6 (XL 2.1) Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3011)
Operating Environment Condi-
tions
Temperature 50 to 86°F
Humidity 15—85% RH
Resolution
Data Processing
Printing
600 × 600 dpi
600 × 1800 dpi (equivalent)
Supported Paper Sizes
Printer Fonts
Maximum Standard Size
PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 136 Fonts
Compatible Computers
IBM PC or compatible, and Macintosh (Power PC, Intel
Processor)
Supported
Operating
Systems
Server
Client
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, or Windows Server 2003
Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6a)
MacOS 9.2 or later or MacOS X 10.2, 10.3 or 10.4
Printer Driver
PCL6:
•
•
Windows 98SE or Windows Me Printer Driver
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003
Printer Driver
•
Windows NT 4.0 Printer Driver
PS3:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windows 98SE or Windows Me PPD File
Windows NT 4.0 Printer Driver
Windows 2000 Printer Driver
Windows XP (Home/Professional) Printer Driver
Windows Server 2003 Printer Driver
Windows XP Professional x64 Printer Driver
Windows Server 2003 x64 Printer Driver
MacOS 9.2 PPD File
MacOS 10.2 Printer Driver
MacOS 10.3 or 10.4 Printer Driver
C250P
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Utility
PageScope Web Connection
Web Browsers:
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later recommended (JavaS-
cript enabled, Cookies enabled)
Microsoft XML Parser MSXML3.X must be installed when us-
ing Internet Explorer 5.5.
Netscape Navigator 7.02 or later (JavaScript enabled, Cook-
ies enabled)
®
®
Macromedia Flash (If “Flash” is selected in View Mode,
version 7.0 or later plugin is required.)
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
120-127 V, 12 A, 50-60 Hz
Less than 1,500 W
25-3/4 (W) × 28 (D) × 23-1/3 (H)
72-3/4 (W) × 45-1/4 (D)
Approx. 168 lb
*2
Space requirements
Weight
*1
There are five Foolscap sizes: 220 mm × 330 mm, 8-1/2 × 13 w, 8-1/4
× 13 w, 8-1/8 × 13-1/4 w and 8 × 13 w. Any one of these sizes can be
selected. For details, contact the technical representative.
*2
The indicated space requirements represent the space required to open
the paper trays, to pull away the finisher and to fully extend the bypass
tray.
In order to incorporate improvements, these product specifications are sub-
ject to change without notice.
C250P
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Option specifications
Automatic Duplex Unit AD-503
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper (17 to 24 lb), thick paper 1 (24-1/4 to 40 lb),
thick paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb),
thick paper 3 (55-3/4 to 68 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17 wto 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w, 12-1/4 × 18 w(A3 Wide)
Width: 5-1/2 to 12-1/4; Length: 5-3/4 to 18
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Supplied from main unit
Less than 17 W
4-1/4 (W) ×17-1/4 (D) × 13-1/2 (H)
Approx. 6-1/2 lb
Weight
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-103
Specifications
Paper types
Paper sizes
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v,
A3 wto B5 w/v
Tray paper capacity
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Tray 3: 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Supplied from main unit
Less than 15 W
22-1/2 (W) × 21-1/2 (D) × 10-1/4 (H)
Approx. 52-3/4 lb
Weight
Unit structure
1 paper tray
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-203
Specifications
Paper types
Paper sizes
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v,
A3 wto B5 w/v
Tray paper capacity
Upper tray (Tray 3): 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Lower tray (Tray 4): 500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Supplied from main unit
Less than 15 W
22-1/2 (W) × 21-1/2 (D) × 10-1/4 (H)
Approx. 61-3/4 lb
Weight
C250P
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Unit structure
2 paper trays
Paper Feed Cabinet PC-403
Specifications
Paper types
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
8-1/2 × 11 v
Tray paper capacity
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
2,500 sheets (21-1/4 lb)
Supplied from main unit
Less than 45 W
22-1/2 (W) × 21-1/2 (D) × 10-1/4 (H)
Approx. 61-3/4 lb
Weight
Finisher FS-603
Specifications
Exit trays
Exit tray 1, exit tray 2
Settings
Normal settings: “Group”, “Sort”, “Offset/Group”, “Offset/
Sort”, “Offset/Staple”, and “Saddle Staple”
Paper types
Exit tray 1:
“Group/Sort” setting: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb), thick paper 1
(24-1/4 to 40 lb), thick paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb), thick pa-
per 3 (55-3/4 to 68 lb), envelopes, overhead projector trans-
parencies, label sheets
“Offset/Sort” setting, “Offset/Group” setting: Plain paper (16
to 24 lb)
Staple: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Exit tray 2:
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
Exit tray 1:
“Group” setting: 11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v, 12-1/4 × 18
w(A3 Wide)
“Sort” setting: 11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 v
“Staple” setting: 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
Exit tray 2: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w
Paper capacity
Exit tray 1:
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb): 1,000 sheets of 8-1/2 × 11 w-size pa-
per or smaller, or 500 sheets of 8-1/2 × 14 w-size paper or
larger
Thick paper 1 (24-1/4 to 40 lb), thick paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/
2 lb), thick paper 3 (55-3/4 to 68 lb), envelopes, overhead pro-
jector transparencies, label sheets: 20 sheets
Exit tray 2:
10 copies (6 to 15 bound pages)*
20 copies (2 to 5 bound pages)
Amount of shift
13/16
C250P
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Staple settings
Exit tray 1:
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 8-1/2 × 11w/v(2 to 50 pag-
es), 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 14 w(2 to 25 pages)
Exit tray 2:
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w(2
to 15 pages)
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Supplied from main unit
Less than 65 W
23-1/4 (W) × 23-3/4 (D) × 38-3/4 (H)
Approx. 92-1/2 lb (including the horizontal transport unit)
Staples MS-5D (5,000 staples for stapling 50 sheets) × 1
Weight
Consumables
*
The number of pages that can be bound together differs depending on
the paper weight. If 17 lb paper is used, 6 to 15 pages can be bound to-
gether. If 21-1/4 lb paper is used, 6 to 10 pages can be bound together.
Punch Kit PK-501
Specifications
Number of punched holes
Paper types
2, 3
Plain paper (16 to 14 lb), thick paper 1 (24-1/4 to 40 lb),
thick paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)
Paper sizes
2-hole: 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
3-hole: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 v
Power requirements
Dimensions
Supplied from finisher
3-1/2 (W) × 22 (D) × 6-3/4 (H)
Approx. 6-1/2 lb
Weight
C250P
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Finisher FS-501
Specifications
Exit trays
Exit tray 1, exit tray 2
Settings
“Sort”, “Group”, “Offset/Sort”, “Offset/Group”, and Staple
settings
Paper types
Exit tray 1:
“Group” setting: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb), thick paper 1 (24-1/
4 to 40 lb), thick paper 2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb), thick paper 3
(55-3/4 to 68 lb), overhead projector transparencies, post-
cards, envelopes, label sheets
Exit tray 2:
“Sort”, “Group”, “Offset/Sort”, “Offset/Group” settings: Plain
paper (16 to 24 lb), thick paper 1 (24-1/4 to 40 lb), thick paper
2 (40-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)
Staple settings: Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
Paper sizes
Exit tray 1:
11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v12-1/4 × 18 (A3 wide)
Exit tray 2:
11 × 17 wto 7-1/4 × 10-1/2 w/v12-1/4 × 18 (A3 wide)
Paper capacity
Exit tray 1:
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb): 250 sheets
Thick paper 1/2/3 (24-1/4 to 68 lb), overhead projector trans-
parencies, envelopes, label sheets, postcards: 20 sheets
Exit tray 2:
Plain paper (21-1/4 lb): 1,000 sheets of 8-1/2 × 11 wor small-
er, or 500 sheets of 8-1/2 × 14 wor larger
Amount of shift
Staple settings
1-3/16
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 × 17 wto 7-1/4 × 10-1/
2 w/v(2 to 30 sheets)
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Supplied from main unit
Less than 63 W
21-1/4 (W) × 25 (D) × 38-1/2 (H)
Weight
Approx. 83-3/4 lb (including the horizontal transport unit)
Staples MS-3C (3,000 staples for stapling 30 sheets) × 1
Consumables
Job Separator JS-601
Specifications
Exit trays
Exit tray 3:
Paper types
Paper sizes
Paper capacity
Dimensions
Weight
Plain paper (16 to 24 lb)
11 × 17 wto 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
100 sheets
13-1/2 (W) × 20-3/4 (D) × 5-3/4 (H)
Approx. 4-1/2 lb
C250P
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Finisher FS-514
Specifications
Finishing trays
Feed settings
Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2
“Sort”, “Group”, “Sort”/“Offset”, “Group”/“Offset”, and “Sort”
and Staple
Paper types
Finishing tray 1, finishing tray 2:
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb)
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 68 lb), OHP transparencies, postcards,
envelopes, label sheets, letterheads
Punch settings: Normal paper (13-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)
Staple settings: Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb), thick paper
(24-1/4 to 32 lb)*
* “Cover Mode” function: Thick paper (24-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w/v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w/v,
12-1/4 × 18 w(A3 Wide w)
Paper capacity
Output tray 1:
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb): 200 sheets
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 68 lb), OHP transparencies, postcards,
envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets
Output tray 2:
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb): 1,000 sheets of 8-1/2 × 11 w
or smaller, or 500 sheets of 8-1/2 × 14 wor larger
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 68 lb), OHP transparencies, postcards,
envelopes, or label sheets, letterheads: 20 sheets
Amount of shift
Staple settings
1-1/4
Paper sizes (no. of bound pages): 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/
v(2 to 50 sheets)
Punch settings
Paper sizes:
2-hole: 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
3-hole: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 v
Number of punched holes: 2, 3
Power requirements
Power consumption
Dimensions
Supplied from main unit
Less than 66 W
13-3/4 (W) × 18-1/2 (D) × 22-1/2 (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 17-1/4 (W)
Weight
73-1/4 lb
Consumables
Staples SK-602 (containing 5,000 staples) × 1
Punch kit PK-510
Specifications
Punched holes
Paper types
2, 3
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 55-1/2 lb)
Paper sizes
2-hole: 11 × 17 wto 8-1/2 × 11 w/v
3-hole: 11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 v
Power requirements
Supplied from finisher
C250P
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Specifications
Dimensions
Weight
4-1/2 (W) × 18-1/4 (D) × 4-1/4 (H)
Approx. 4-1/4 lb
Saddle stitcher SD-503
Specifications
Number of bins
Paper types
1 bin
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb), thick paper (24-1/4 to 55-1/2
lb)
Paper sizes
11 × 17 w, 8-1/2 × 11 w
Paper capacity
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb): Maximum 200 sheets or 20
sets
Staple settings
Dimensions
Number of bound pages: 2 to 15 sheets
17-1/2 (W) × 8 (D) × 18-3/4 (H)
When the tray is pulled out: 22-3/4 (W) × 11 (D)
Weight
16-1/4 lb
Consumables
Power requirements
MS-2C cartridge (for 2,000) × 1
Supplied from finisher
Output tray OT-601
Specifications
Number of bins
Paper capacity
1 bin
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb): Maximum 200 sheets
Thick paper (24-1/4 to 68 lb), postcards, envelopes, OHP, or
label sheets, letterheads: Maximum 20 sheets
Dimensions
Weight
11 (W) × 14-1/2 (D) × 2-1/4 (H)
1-1/2 lb
Mailbin kit MT-501
Specifications
Number of bins
Paper types
4 bins
Normal paper (13-1/4 to 24 lb)
8-1/2 × 11 v, 5-1/2 × 8-1/2 w
Maximum 125 sheets per bin
13-1/2 (W) × 20 (D) × 15-1/4 (H)
Approx. 17-1/2 lb (unit weight)
Supplied from finisher
Paper sizes
Paper capacity
Dimensions
Weight
Power requirements
C250P
10-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
10.5 Glossary
Glossary
Term
Definition
10Base-T/100Base-TX/
1000Base-T
An Ethernet standard, which is a cable consisting of twisted copper
wire pairs. The transmission speed of 10Base-T is 10 Mbps, of
100Base-TX is 100 Mbps, and of 1000Base-T is 1000 Mbps.
AppleTalk
A generic name for the protocol suite developed by Apple Computer
for computer networking
APS
ATS
bit
“Auto Paper Select” setting
Automatic paper-tray-switching feature (ATS=Auto tray Switch)
Abbreviation for Binary Digit. The smallest unit of information (data
quantity) on a computer or printer. Displays data using 0 or 1.
BMP
Abbreviation for Bitmap. A file format for saving image data which
uses the .bmp extension. Commonly used on Windows platforms.
You can specify the color depth from monochrome (2 values) to full
color (16,777,216 colors). Images are not usually compressed when
saved.
Bonjour
BOOTP
Macintosh network technology for automatically detecting devices
connected to the network and for specifying settings. Previously
called “Rendezvous”, the name was changed to “Bonjour” starting
with Mac OS X v10.4.
Abbreviation for Bootstrap Protocol. A protocol in which a client
computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies the network
settings from the server. Currently, DHCP, which is an advanced
protocol based on BOOTP, is mainly used.
Brightness
Byte
Brightness of a display screen
Unit of information (data quantity) on a computer or printer. Config-
ured as 1 byte equals 8 bits.
Client
A computer that uses the services provided by a server through a
network
CMYK
Abbreviation for Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black. The colors in the
toner and ink used for color printing can all be represented by
changing the mixing ratio of the four colors of CMYK.
Color Matching
Default Gateway
DHCP
Technology for decreasing the difference in color among different
devices such as scanners, displays, and printers
A device, such as a computer or router, used as a “gateway” to ac-
cess computers not on the same LAN
Abbreviation for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol in
which a client computer on a TCP/IP network automatically specifies
the network settings from the server. With collective management of
the IP address for DHCP clients on the DHCP server, you can avoid
duplication of an address and you can build a network easily.
DNS
Abbreviation for Domain Name System. A system that acquires the
supported IP addresses from host names in a network environment.
DNS allows the user to access other computers over a network by
specifying host names, instead of difficult to memorize and under-
stand IP addresses.
C250P
10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Term
Definition
DPI (dpi)
Abbreviation for Dots Per Inch. A resolution unit used by printers and
scanners. Indicates how many dots per inch are represented in an
image. The higher the value, the higher the resolution.
Driver
Software that works as a bridge between a computer and a periph-
eral device.
Ethernet
LAN transmission line standard
Frame Type
Type of communication format used in a NetWare environment.
Communication is not possible if the same frame type is not used.
FTP
Abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. A protocol for transferring
files over the Internet or an intranet on the TCP/IP network.
Gateway
Hardware and software used as the point where a network is con-
nected to a network. A gateway also changes data formats, ad-
dresses, and protocols according to the connected network.
Grayscale
Hard Disk
Monochrome image expressive form using the gradation information
from black to white
Large capacity storage device for storing data. The data can be
stored even if the power is turned off.
Host Name
HTTP
Displayed name of a device over a network
Abbreviation for HyperText Transfer Protocol. A protocol used to
send and receive data between a Web server and a client (Web
browser). Documents containing images, recordings, and video clips
can be exchanged with the expressive form information.
IEEE 1284
Install
Abbreviation for Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 1284.
A parallel port standard that was developed for printers.
To install hardware, operating systems, applications, printer drivers
on to a computer
IPP
Abbreviation for Internet Printing Protocol. A protocol that sends and
receives print data and controls printers over the Internet on a TCP/
IP network. Data can also be sent to printers in remote areas to print
over the Internet.
IPX
A protocol used with NetWare and works at the network layer of the
OSI reference model
IPX/SPX
Abbreviation for Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. A protocol developed by Novel, Inc. that is commonly
used under a NetWare environment.
IP Address
LAN
A code (address) that is used to identify individual network devices
over the Internet. A maximum of three digits for four numbers are
displayed such as 192.168.1.10. IP addresses are assigned to devic-
es, including computers, which are connected to the Internet.
Abbreviation for Local Area Network. A network which connects
computers on the same floor, in the same building, or in neighboring
buildings.
Local Printer
LPD
A printer connected to a parallel or USB port of a computer
Abbreviation for Line Printer Daemon. A printer protocol that uses
TCP/IP and is platform-independent. Originally developed for BSD
UNIX, it has become the standard printing protocol and can be used
with any general computer.
C250P
10-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Term
Definition
LPR/LPD
Abbreviation for Line Printer Request/Line Printer Daemon. A print-
ing method over a network in a Windows NT system or UNIX system.
Using TCP/IP, you can output print data from Windows or Unix to a
printer over a network.
MAC Address
Abbreviation for Media Access Control address. With a special ID
number for each Ethernet card, data can be sent and received be-
tween the cards. A number consists of 48 bits. The first 24 bits con-
sist of a special number for each manufacture controlling and
assigning IEEE. The last 24 bits consist of a number that the manu-
facturer assigns uniquely to the card.
®
®
Macromedia Flash
Software developed by Macromedia, Inc. and used to create data
combining vector-graphic animation and sound, and the format of
this data file. The bidirectional content can be manipulated using a
keyboard and a mouse. The files can be kept relatively compact, and
they can be accessed with the Web browser plug-in.
Memory
NDPS
Storage device for storing data temporally. When the power is
turned off the data may or may not be erased.
Abbreviation for Novell Distributed Print Services. Provides a highly
efficient printing solution in an NDS environment. By using the NDPS
as a printer server, you can output from the desired printer, automat-
ically download the printer driver of a newly installed printer, simplify
and automate complicated management environments related to
printer use, and integrate management related to the network print-
er.
NDS
Abbreviation for Novell Directory Services. The servers and printers
on a network and the shared resources of the user’s information, as
well as the user’s access authority over these items can be consoli-
dated in the hierarchy structure.
NetBIOS
NetBEUI
Abbreviation for Network Basic Input Output System. A communica-
tion interface developed by IBM.
Abbreviation for NetBIOS Extended User Interface. A network proto-
col developed by IBM. By simply specifying the computer name, you
can build a small-scale network.
NetWare
Network operating system developed by Novell. NetWare IPX/SPX
is used as the communication protocol.
Nprinter/Rprinter
Remote printer support module for using a printer server under a
NetWare environment. Use NetWare 3.x with Rprinter, and NetWare
4.x with Nprinter.
OHP Interleave
OHP/OHT
OS
Set this function to insert paper between overhead projector trans-
parencies that are being printed.
OHP (overhead projector) transparencies which are used for presen-
tations
Abbreviation for Operating System. Basic software for controlling
the system of a computer.
Outline Font
A font using lines and curves to display an outline of a character.
Large-size characters can be displayed on a screen or printed with
no jagged edges.
Parallel Interface
Data transmission method for sending and receiving data of multiple
signals simultaneously. IEEE 1284 is commonly used as the printer
connection.
C250P
10-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Term
Definition
PDF
Abbreviation for Portable Document Format. An electronically for-
matted document which uses the .pdf extension. Based on the Post-
Script format, you can use the free Adobe Acrobat Reader software
to view documents.
PDL
Abbreviation for Page Description Language. The language for spec-
ifying the print image per page to a printer when printing using a
page printer.
Peer-to-peer
Plug-and-play
PostScript
PPD
A network format that allows connected devices to communicate
without using a dedicated server
Ability to automatically find and use the appropriate driver when a
peripheral device is connected to a computer
A typical page-descriptive language developed by Adobe and is
commonly used for high quality printing
Abbreviation for PostScript Printer Description. A file used to de-
scribe the resolution, usable paper size, and the PostScript printer
model special information.
Preview
A function that allows you to view an image before processing a print
or scan job
Print Job
Print request transmitted from a computer to a printing device
Print Queue
A software system which queues the generated print job in the de-
vices
Printer Buffer
Profile
Memory domain temporarily used for data processing of a print job
Color attribute file
The dedicated file that contains the summarized correlation of the in-
put and output of each primary color used so that the color input and
output devices can reproduce the color.
Proof Print
Property
Press this key to print a single sample print and stop the machine so
that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies. This
prevents print errors from occurring in a large number of copies.
Attribute information
When using a printer driver, various functions can be specified in the
file properties.
In the file properties, you can check the attribute information of the
file.
Protocol
The rules that allow computers to communicate with other comput-
ers or peripheral devices
Proxy Server
A server that is installed to act as an intermediary connection be-
tween each client and different servers to effectively ensure security
over the entire system for Internet connections
Pserver
Queue Name
RIP
Print server module under a NetWare environment that monitors,
changes, pauses, restarts, or cancels a print job
Name specified to each device that allows printing when network
printing
Abbreviation for Raster Image Processor. Process that develops pic-
ture images from described text data using the PostScript page de-
scription language. The processor is usually integrated in the printer.
C250P
10-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Term
Definition
RGB
Abbreviation for Red, Green, and Blue. Represents all colors by
changing the brightness ratio of the RGB 3 colors using the primary
colors used by the color representation in a monitor.
Resolution
Samba
Displays the ability to reproduce the details of images and print mat-
ter correctly
UNIX server software that uses SMB (Server Message Block) so that
UNIX system resources can be used from a Windows environment.
Save in User Box
Temporarily saves the job on the HDD so that it can later be recalled
and used again
Screen Font
A font for displaying text and symbols on a CRT monitor
Shared Printer
A printer setup that allows the printer to be used by multiple comput-
ers connected to a server over a network
SLP
Abbreviation for Service Location Protocol. A protocol capable of
finding services over a TCP/IP network and automatically specifying
a client.
SMB
Abbreviation for Server Message Block. A protocol that shares files
and printers over a network and which is mainly used by Microsoft
Windows.
SMTP
SNMP
Spool
Abbreviation for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. A protocol for send-
ing and forwarding e-mail.
Abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol. A manage-
ment protocol in a network environment using TCP/IP.
Abbreviation for Simultaneous Peripheral Operation On-Line. For
printer output, data is not sent directly to the printer, it is temporarily
stored in another location, then sent to the printer collectively.
Subnet Mask
TCP/IP
The unit used to divide a TCP/IP network into small networks (sub-
networks). It is used to identify the bits in a network address that are
higher than the IP address.
Abbreviation for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
The de facto standard protocol used by the Internet that uses IP ad-
dresses to identify each network device.
TrueType
An outline font that was developed by Apple Computer and Micro-
soft. It is used as a standard by Macintosh and Microsoft Windows
and can be used both on a display and in print.
Uninstall
USB
To delete software installed on a computer
Abbreviation for Universal Serial Bus. A general interface standard
for connecting a mouse, printer, and other devices to a computer.
Web Browser
WINS
Software such as Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator for view-
ing Web pages
Abbreviation for Windows Internet Naming Service. A service for re-
calling named servers for the conversion of computer names and IP
address in a Windows environment.
C250P
10-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10.6 Index
A
E
Account name ................................4-31
Add Printer Wizard .........................2-10
Admin. setting ................................4-38
Admin. setting menu ......................4-10
Arrow keys .......................................4-2
Editing forms ................................. 3-27
Electrostatic charger wire ................ 7-4
Energy Star .......................................x-1
Ethernet ......................................... 1-43
F
Finisher FS-501
Fold position .................................. 4-31
B
Back cover ...........................3-22, 3-57
Bindery ...........................................2-53
Binding position .............................4-31
C
Center binding ................................5-30
Changing the settings ........3-67, 3-109
Cleaning ...........................................7-2
Configuration page .......................10-11
Consumables ...................................6-2
Copies & Pages ..............................3-98
Custom page ........................3-82, 3-97
Custom size .........................3-12, 3-49
G
Hole punching ..................... 3-17, 3-56
I
I/F setting ...................................... 4-41
Installer ............................................ 2-7
Installing ................................ 2-5, 2-22
Interfaces ....................................... 1-43
IPP printing .................................... 2-50
D
Deleting the settings ......................3-40
Device options .....................3-69, 3-72
Document number .........................3-31
Double-sided ........................3-14, 3-54
Duplex unit .......................................8-8
J
Job operation ............ 4-10, 4-31, 9-25
Job separator ................................ 1-32
C250P
10-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Order for selecting the paper trays
L
.......................................................... 5-9
Labels .............................................1-16
Laser safety ....................................1-10
List output ......................................4-43
Loading copy paper .......................5-10
Low power mode ...........................1-41
LPR .................................................2-34
PageScope Web Connection
................................................ 2-40, 9-2
M
Macintosh .................. 2-21, 2-35, 2-64
Main menu .....................................4-10
Main unit .........................................10-2
Maintenance .....................................7-2
Margin ..................................3-16, 3-55
Menu operations ..............................4-3
Menu/Select .....................................4-2
Messages .......................................8-67
Paper capacities .............................. 5-4
Paper take-up roller ......................... 7-3
Parameters .................................... 4-31
PCL driver ....................................... 3-5
Plug and Play ................................ 2-16
Port 9100 ....................................... 2-34
Port 9100 printing .......................... 2-46
PostScript driver ............................ 3-41
Power save .................................... 4-33
PPD driver ..................................... 3-68
PPD driver (Mac OS 9.2) ............... 3-76
PPD driver (Mac OS X) .................. 3-90
Print ............................................... 3-84
Multiple pages on one page
.......................... 3-15, 3-54, 3-85, 3-99
N
NetWare .........................................2-34
Network Connection ......................2-35
Network printing .............................2-33
Network setting ..............................4-38
Non-standard-sized paper ...............5-2
O
OpenAPI .........................................4-51
Option ............ 1-19, 3-37, 3-62, 3-74,
3-88, 3-107
Option specifications .....................10-5
C250P
10-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
Print dialog box ....................3-78, 3-92
Print jobs ........................................9-25
Printer Selection .............................2-24
Printer setting .................................4-35
Printer-specific options ..................3-86
Printing ...........................................3-98
Printing functions .............................3-2
Proof and print ...............................9-25
Punch .............................................5-29
Punch kit ........................................1-30
Specifications ................................ 10-2
Standard-sized paper ...................... 5-2
Staple jam ..................................... 8-44
System setting ............................... 4-33
Q
T
Quality ..................... 3-34, 3-60, 3-104
Quality adjustment .........................3-60
Time adjustment ............................ 4-41
Tray 2 .................................. 5-15, 8-10
Trouble ............................................ 8-2
Turning on the machine ................. 1-39
R
Recalling a job ................................9-28
Regulation notices ............................1-9
Replacing the waste toner box ......6-24
Right-side door ..............................8-14
S
Safety label .....................................1-14
Save in user box .............................9-25
Save in user box and print .............9-25
U
Saving the driver settings
.................................. 3-39, 3-65, 3-108
Uninstalling .......................... 2-20, 2-29
USB interface ................................ 1-43
User box .................... 3-20, 3-51, 4-31
User box oper. ............................... 4-42
User mode ....................................... 9-8
User setting ................................... 4-33
Secure print ..........................4-31, 9-25
Secured printing ...................3-19, 3-50
Security ........................................3-100
Security setting ..............................4-43
Select color ....................................3-60
C250P
10-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
User setting menu ..........................4-10
User’s guide conventions ...............x-17
V
Viewing the settings
.................................. 3-40, 3-66, 3-108
W
Waste container ...............................7-6
Watermark ............................3-29, 3-58
C250P
10-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
10
C250P
10-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|